628series CHN

CHN628
Carbon/Hydrogen/Nitrogen
Determinator
Instruction Manual
Version 1.1x
Part Number 200-731
September 2012
Patents are Pending in U.S.A. and other countries

2012 LECO Corporation
Minor revisions may not be reflected in this manual.
Introduction
The Introduction chapter contains general information about the
CHN628 Series Determinators. This includes safety guidelines and
warranty terms. Reference this chapter for replacement parts,
operating supplies and optional accessories. To place an order by
phone, call our customer service department toll-free in the United
States at 1-800-292-6141 or 269-985-5496. Orders may also be sent
by fax to 269-982-8977.
Introduction
Illustrations .................................................................................. 17
WEEE......................................................................................... 111
Warranty.................................................................................... 116
LECO-Supplied Dell Computers ..................................................... 118
Interference to Other Devices ....................................................... 120
Declaration of Conformity ............................................................. 121
Software License ......................................................................... 122
Equipment Packages .................................................................... 126
Options ...................................................................................... 127
Components and Accessories List .................................................. 130
Specifications ............................................................................. 132
Installation
Illustrations .................................................................................. 22
Instrument Installation .................................................................. 23
Computer Installation .................................................................. 211
Data Transmit Installation ............................................................ 212
Apply Power ............................................................................... 213
Option Installation
Illustrations .................................................................................. 32
Balance Installation ....................................................................... 33
Stackable Carousels ...................................................................... 37
Introduction
CHN628
13
System Setup
Illustrations .................................................................................. 44
Front Panel Controls and Functions .................................................. 45
Menu Overview ............................................................................. 47
Apply Power ............................................................................... 414
Select Language.......................................................................... 415
Determining User Permissions....................................................... 416
Display Configuration ................................................................... 420
System Configuration .................................................................. 431
Method Configuration................................................................... 436
Define Calibration Standards ........................................................ 447
Sample Filters ............................................................................. 452
User Defined Fields...................................................................... 456
Managing Databases .................................................................... 459
Deleting Analyzed Samples........................................................... 478
Operation
Illustrations .................................................................................. 54
First Time Analysis ........................................................................ 55
Shutdown Procedure .................................................................... 512
Sample Preparation ..................................................................... 513
Login ......................................................................................... 517
Correct for Moisture ..................................................................... 520
Correct for Atmospheric Blank ...................................................... 521
Enter a Mass from the Balance ...................................................... 522
Analyze a Sample ........................................................................ 523
Samples ..................................................................................... 539
Printing Reports .......................................................................... 545
Text Export Data ......................................................................... 549
Text Import Data ........................................................................ 559
Transmit Data ............................................................................. 560
Transmit Selected Samples .......................................................... 568
Data Backup ............................................................................... 569
Transfer Import .......................................................................... 571
Error Messages ........................................................................... 572
14
CHN628
Introduction
Maintenance
Illustrations .................................................................................. 63
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 64
Air Filter Cleaning.......................................................................... 66
Aliquot Dosing Valve Cleaning ......................................................... 67
Ballast Tank Cleaning .................................................................... 69
Carousel Cleaning ....................................................................... 617
Reduction Heater Tube Packing ..................................................... 619
Combustion Tube Removal and Replacement .................................. 623
Combustion Tube Packing ............................................................ 629
Crucible Replacement .................................................................. 632
Loading Head Cleaning................................................................. 634
O-rings ...................................................................................... 638
Reagent Tube Packing.................................................................. 639
Primary Furnace Filters Cleaning ................................................... 641
Secondary Wire Screen Filter Inspection and Replacement ............... 643
Login Periodic Maintenance ........................................................... 644
View Log File .............................................................................. 645
Configure Maintenance Counters ................................................... 646
Reset Maintenance Counters ......................................................... 648
Theory of Operation
Illustrations .................................................................................. 72
Theory of Operation CHN628 .......................................................... 73
Method of Standard Additions ......................................................... 76
Calculations .................................................................................. 78
Barometric Pressure ...................................................................... 79
Thermal Conductivity Cell ............................................................. 710
Infrared Radiation Cell ................................................................. 712
Theory of Calibration ................................................................... 713
Comparator Level ........................................................................ 720
Introduction
CHN628
15
Diagnostics
Illustrations .................................................................................. 82
Ambient Monitor ........................................................................... 83
Calibrations .................................................................................. 87
Network Diagnostics .................................................................... 811
Furnace Diagnostics..................................................................... 813
Leak Check ................................................................................. 816
System Check ............................................................................. 829
Solenoids and Switches ................................................................ 831
Service
Illustrations .................................................................................. 93
Installing LECO Software ................................................................ 94
Configuring the Ethernet Adapter .................................................. 913
Configuring Firewall Settings ........................................................ 918
Registering Software ................................................................... 919
Troubleshooting Copy Protection Key ............................................. 925
Loading Head Alignment and Adjustment ....................................... 926
Loading Head Interface Block Cleaning .......................................... 931
Carousel Alignment ..................................................................... 933
TC Cell Removal and Service ........................................................ 935
IR Cell Removal and Service ......................................................... 936
IR Detector Linearization .............................................................. 937
IR Cell Saturation Optimization ..................................................... 939
Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 943
10
Illustrations
11
Schematics
12
Index
16
CHN628
Introduction
Illustrations
Figure 2-1 Rear Panel ....26
Figure 2-2 Lance Installation ...........................................................27
Figure 2-3 Crucible Installation ........................................................28
Figure 2-4 Reagent Tube Packing .....................................................210
Figure 3-1 Balance Control Panel ......................................................35
Figure 3-2 Carousel Open Position ....................................................37
Figure 3-3 Carousel Bottom Plate .....................................................38
Figure 3-4 Carousel Mounting Position ..............................................38
Figure 3-5 Stacked Carousels ..........................................................39
Figure 4-1 Front Panel Controls and Functions ...................................45
Figure 5-1 Sample PreparationGel Capsule Method ..........................513
Figure 5-2 Sample PreparationQuick Sampler Method ......................514
Figure 5-3 Sample PreparationManual Method .................................515
Figure 5-4 Sample PreparationFoiler Method ...................................516
Figure 6-1 Aliquot Dosing Valve .......................................................68
Figure 6-2 Ballast Top Assembly ......................................................611
Figure 6-3 Ballast Connections .........................................................612
Figure 6-4 C-Flex Tubing Connection ................................................613
Figure 6-5 Stainless Line from Ballast to Doser Disconnected ...............614
Figure 6-6 Ballast Disassembly ........................................................615
Figure 6-7 Carousel Bottom View .....................................................617
Figure 6-8 Carousel Bearings ...........................................................618
Figure 6-9 Reduction Heater ............................................................621
Figure 6-10 Packing the Reduction Heater Tube .................................622
Figure 6-11 Furnace Interface Blocks ................................................625
Figure 6-12 Afterburner Interface Block ............................................626
Figure 6-13 Furnace Latch Pin..........................................................626
Figure 6-14 Combustion Furnace Assembly .......................................627
Figure 6-15 Secondary Wire Screen Filter ..........................................628
Figure 6-16 Lance Assembly ............................................................630
Figure 6-17 Combustion Tube Packing ..............................................631
Figure 6-18 Loading Head Removal Screws .......................................633
Figure 6-19 Lance Removal .............................................................633
Figure 6-20 Slide Block Removal ......................................................634
Figure 6-21 Slide Block (Bottom View) ..............................................635
Figure 6-22 Lance Shield and Lance Tool ...........................................636
Figure 6-23 Female Jaw and Loading Pin ...........................................636
Figure 6-24 Reagent Tube Packing ...................................................640
Figure 6-25 Filter Locations .............................................................642
Figure 7-1 CHN628 Measurement Flow Diagram .................................74
Introduction
CHN628
17
Figure 7-2 Pneumatic Flow Diagram .................................................75

Figure 7-3 Thermal Conductivity of Gases .........................................711
Figure 8-1 Analytical Function Diagram .............................................820
Figure 8-2 Oxygen Leak Check Flow Diagram ....................................821
Figure 8-3 Helium Leak Check Flow Diagram .....................................822
Figure 8-4 Oxygen Leak Check (Combustion) Diagram ........................823
Figure 8-5 Oxygen Leak Check (Ballast) Diagram ...............................824
Figure 8-6 Oxygen Leak Check (Doser Aliquot) Flow Diagram ..............825
Figure 8-7 Helium Doser Leak Check ................................................826
Figure 8-8 Helium Bypass Doser Leak Check......................................827
Figure 8-9 Linear Function Diagram ..................................................828
Figure 9-1 Male Mounting Block Top Screws ......................................927
Figure 9-2 Male Mounting Block Screws ............................................928
Figure 9-3 Loading Heading AlignmentInterface Block ......................929
Figure 9-4 Slide Block Speed Adjustments .........................................930
Figure 9-5 Carousel Actuator Arm Alignment .....................................934
Figure 9-6 Carousel Alignment .........................................................934
Figure 10-1 Pneumatic Manifold Assembly .........................................103
Figure 10-2 TC Cell Assembly Connector ...........................................104
Figure 10-3 TC Cell Manifold Assembly ..............................................105
Figure 10-4 TC Cell Assembly Card ...................................................107
Figure 10-5 TC Cell Leads................................................................108
Figure 10-6 TC Cell Assembly ..........................................................109
Figure 10-7 Oven Blower Assembly ..................................................1010
Figure 10-8 Heater Plates Assembly .................................................1011
Figure 10-9 Attaching Heater Plate Assembly .....................................1012
Figure 10-10 Particle Filter Upper Block Assembly ..............................1013
Figure 10-11 Particle Filter Lower Block Assembly ..............................1014
Figure 10-12 Particle Filter Front Door Assembly ................................1015
Figure 10-13 Doser Block Assembly ..................................................1016
Figure 10-14 Secondary Oven Upper Wall Panel Assembly ...................1017
Figure 10-15 Secondary Oven Upper Wall Assembly ...........................1018
Figure 10-16 Catalyst Heater Lower Block Assembly ...........................1019
Figure 10-17 Catalyst Heater Back Panel Assembly ............................1020
Figure 10-18 Catalyst Heater Front Panel Assembly ............................1021
Figure 10-19 Pinch Valve Plate Assembly ..........................................1023
Figure 10-20 Pinch Valve Electrical Assembly .....................................1024
Figure 10-21 Top Panel Assembly .....................................................1025
Figure 10-22 Power Distribution Panel Assembly ................................1026
Figure 10-23 Power Distribution Panel Card Assembly .........................1027
Figure 10-24 Power Distribution Panel Wiring Harness Assembly ..........1029
Figure 10-25 IR Cell Assembly .........................................................1030
18
CHN628
Introduction
Figure 10-26 Left Side Panel Assembly..............................................1031

Figure 10-27 Dual Furnace Cap Assembly ..........................................1032
Figure 10-28 Dosing Valve Pneumatic Cylinder Assembly ....................1033
Figure 10-29 Dosing Valve 8-Port Valve Block Assembly .....................1034
Figure 10-30 Dosing Valve Spring Clamp Assembly ............................1035
Figure 10-31 Micron Filter Assembly .................................................1036
Figure 10-32 Loading Head Sliding Block Assembly ............................1037
Figure 10-33 Loading Head Top Block Assembly .................................1039
Figure 10-34 Loading Head Solenoid Assembly ..................................1041
Figure 10-35 Loading Head Air Cylinder Assembly ..............................1042
Figure 10-36 Loading Head Cylinder Cover Assembly ..........................1043
Figure 10-37 Oven Door Assembly ...................................................1044
Figure 10-38 Oven Heater Shelf Assembly .........................................1045
Figure 10-39 Ballast Plate Assembly .................................................1046
Figure 10-40 Ballast Top Bracket Assembly .......................................1047
Figure 10-41 Ballast Interface Manifold Block Assembly ......................1048
Figure 10-42 Connect Interface Manifold To Ballast ............................1049
Figure 10-43 IR Cell Mounting Base Assembly....................................1050
Figure 10-44 TC Cell Interface Manifold Assembly ..............................1051
Figure 10-45 Oven Fan Bracket Assembly .........................................1052
Figure 10-46 Oven Enclosure Assembly .............................................1053
Figure 10-47 TC Cell Assembly.........................................................1054
Figure 10-48 Oven Mounting Plate Assembly .....................................1055
Figure 10-49 Pneumatic and Furnace Flow Manifold Assembly ..............1056
Figure 10-50 Pneumatic Manifold Block Assembly 1 of 2 ......................1057
Figure 10-52 Fan Assembly .............................................................1060
Figure 10-53 IR Cell Bypass Assembly ..............................................1061
Figure 10-54 Door Assembly............................................................1063
Figure 10-55 Heater Wire Assembly ..................................................1065
Figure 10-56 Top Furnace Plate Assembly .........................................1067
Figure 10-57 Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Assembly...........1068
Figure 10-58 Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Bottom
Plate Assembly ..............................................................................1069
Figure 10-59 Upper Fan Assembly ....................................................1071
Figure 10-60 Left and Right Furnace Manifold Assembly ......................1072
Figure 10-61 Furnace Manifold Solenoid Assembly..............................1073
Figure 10-62 Furnace Manifold Pressure Relief Valve Assembly ............1074
Figure 10-63 Thermoelectric Cooler Condensing Block Assembly ..........1075
Figure 10-64 Thermoelectric Cooler Heat Pump Assembly ...................1076
Figure 10-65 Thermoelectric Cooler Chiller Cover Assembly .................1077
Figure 10-66 Thermoelectric Cooler Tubing Assembly .........................1078
Figure 10-67 Furnace Reduction Heater Assembly ..............................1079
Introduction
CHN628
19
Figure 10-68 Catalyst Heater Assembly .............................................1080

Figure 10-69 Filter Door Assembly....................................................1081
Figure 10-70 Bracket and Fan Assembly............................................1082
Figure 10-71 Heater Cable Assembly ................................................1083
Figure 10-72 Heater Power Cable Assembly .......................................1084
Figure 10-73 Pneumatic Manifold Assembly Part 1 ..............................1085
Figure 11-1 Distribution and Power Entry ..........................................113
Figure 11-2 Pneumatic Flow Card .....................................................114
Figure 11-3 Heater Control ..............................................................115
110
CHN628
Introduction
WEEE
Disposal of WEEE and the Wheeled Bin Symbol
In 2002, the European Union introduced the Directive on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). The main aim of the
Directive is to ensure that WEEE is collected and treated separately.
WEEE may contain hazardous substances that should not end up in the
(human) environment because it can have adverse effects on it.
Furthermore, WEEE is a vast source of raw materials. With the ever
rising worldwide demand for new equipment and the ever decreasing
volume of raw materials in nature, letting this potential source of such
materials go to waste is unacceptable.
If equipment is collected separately, the equipment can be recycled
and up to 85% to 90% of the equipment can be reused as new
material, saving the use of virgin raw materials and energy of
producing these. Separate collection and treatment of WEEE will thus
decrease CO2 emissions as well.
For the above reasons, LECO expects end users to dispose of the
material in an environmentally friendly way, being separate collection
and treatment.
Electrical and Electronic Equipment is labeled with the following
crossed-out wheeled bin symbol, indicating that the equipment
should be disposed of by the end user separate from other types of
waste.
End users should contact their dealer/distributor or our company on

disposal, collection, and recycling options in their country.
Introduction
CHN628
111
Warranty
Equipment manufactured by LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan is
warranted free from defect in material and workmanship for a period
of 1) thirteen months from date of shipment or 2) twelve months from
date of installation, whichever occurs first. Equipment not
manufactured by LECO is covered to the extent of warranty provided
by the original manufacturer and this warranty does not cover any
equipment, new or used, purchased from anyone other than LECO
Corporation. All replacement parts shall be covered under warranty for
a period of thirty days from date of purchase. LECO makes no other
representation or warranty of any other kind, expressed or
implied, with respect to the goods sold hereunder, whether as
to merchantability, fitness for purpose, or otherwise.
Expendable items such as crucibles, combustion tubes, chemicals, and
items of like nature are not covered by this warranty.
LECO's sole obligation under this warranty shall be to repair or replace
any part or parts which, to our satisfaction, prove to be defective upon
return prepaid to LECO Corporation, St. Joseph, Michigan. This
obligation does not include labor to install replacement parts, nor does
it cover any failure due to accident, abuse, neglect, or use in disregard
of instructions furnished by LECO. In no event shall damages for
defective goods exceed the purchase price of the goods, and LECO
shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages
whatsoever.
All claims in regard to the parts or equipment must be made within ten
(10) days after Purchaser learns of the facts upon which the claim is
based. Authorization must be obtained from LECO prior to returning
any other parts. This warranty is voided by failure to comply with
these notice requirements.
116
CHN628
Introduction
Notice
The warranty on LECO equipment remains valid only when
genuine LECO replacement parts are employed. Since LECO has
no control over the quality or purity of consumable products not
manufactured by LECO, the specifications for accuracy of results using
LECO instruments are not guaranteed unless genuine LECO
consumables are employed in conjunction with LECO instruments. If
purchaser defaults in making payment for any parts or equipment, this
warranty shall be void and shall not apply to such parts and
equipment. No late payment or cure of default in payment shall extend
the warranty period provided herein.
LECO Corporation is not responsible for damage to any associated
instruments, equipment, or apparatus nor will LECO be held liable for
loss of profit or other special damages resulting from abuse, neglect,
or use in disregard of instructions. The Buyer, their employees,
agents, and successors in interest assume all risks and liabilities for
the operation, use, and/or misuse of the product(s) described herein
and agree to indemnify, hold harmless, and defend the seller from any
and all claims and actions arising from any cause whatsoever,
including seller's negligence for personal injury incurred in connection
with the use of said product(s) and any and all damages proximately
resulting therefrom.
Introduction
CHN628
117
LECO-Supplied Dell Computers

Dell Support
All LECO supplied Dell PC's include Dell's ProSupport Service, which is
designed to provide a base level of customer security. This service
option can place a Dell-certified technician at your location the
following day, if necessary (after phone-based troubleshooting). In
many cases, remote troubleshooting can minimize overall system
downtime by getting the issue quickly fixed remotely or helping Dell to
dispatch the right part (if necessary).
The inclusion of Dell ProSupport with LECO supplied PCs ensures that
any computer related service issues are handled directly by the
experts at Dell. This eliminates the unnecessary step of working
through the LECO service professionals for a resolution from Dell, and
provides PC support 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
Dell ProSupport provides expert assistance when you need rapid
problem resolution to help maximize your PC system's uptime and
productivity. ProSupport provides the following benefits:
24 x 7 Access to advanced-level North American-based phone
technicians
Live Chat tech support
DellConnect remote diagnosis and resolution
Next Business Day On-Site Service after Remote Diagnostics
For more information, call 1-800-WWW-DELL (1-800-999-3355) or
access Dell's website by copying and pasting the following link into
your internet browser:
http://www.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/services
/prosupport/end_users?c=us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz
Please have your Service Tag and Express Service Code numbers
available when contacting Dell to expedite service. These can be
found on the back or side of the tower.
118
CHN628
Introduction
Transferring Ownership of a Dell Product

The following section explains the steps to transfer the warranty and
ownership of a Dell computer. This transfer is necessary to complete
when an equipment package that includes a Dell computer has been
purchased from LECO.
An internet connection is required to complete the transfer. If an

internet connection is not available, the transfer can be completed
by calling Dell at 800-624-9897.
To complete the transfer online through Dell's website, complete

either the Domestic Customer procedure or the International
Customer procedure as explained in the following steps.
For Domestic Customers:

1.
Access Dell's website by copying and pasting or entering the

following website URL into your internet browser:
http://support.dell.com/support/topics/global.aspx/support/chang
e_order/tag_transfer?c=us&l=en&s=gen&redirect=1
It is recommended to complete the transfer of ownership from the

computer from which the ownership will be transferred. If this is not
possible, follow the instructions provided on Dell's website.
2.
Complete the transfer by completing and submitting the form

provided on Dell's website.
For International Customers:

1.
Access Dell's website by copying and pasting or entering the

following website URL into your internet browser:
http://support.dell.com/support/topics/global.aspx/support/chang
e_order/tag_transfer?c=us&l=en&s=gen&redirect=1
It is recommended to complete the transfer of ownership from the

computer from which the ownership will be transferred. If this is not
possible, follow the instructions provided on Dell's website.
2.
Do not enter information into the fields. Instead, click

International Transfer Form located below the form fields.
3.
On the form, for original owner,
4.
Introduction
A.
For First Original Owner, enter "LECO Corp"
B.
For Original Owner E-mail Address, enter

"[email protected]"
C.
For Country of Original Purchase, click the arrow and select

United States from the list.
Complete the transfer by following the remaining instructions

provided on the form.
CHN628
119
Interference to Other Devices

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Regulations. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following methods:
120
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving

antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the

radio or television receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different

from that which the radio or television receiver is currently
connected.
Consult the radio or television dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.
CHN628
Introduction
Declaration of Conformity
Introduction
CHN628
121
Software License
By installing the Licensed Software, the Licensee acknowledges that
Licensee has read it, understands it and agrees to be bound by its
terms, and further agree that this is the complete and exclusive
statement of the Software License between the parties, which
supersedes and merges all prior proposals, understandings and other
agreements oral and written, between the parties relating to the
subject matter of this Software License. In the event of any conflict
between the terms of this Software License and the terms of purchase
orders submitted by Licensee, the terms of this Software License shall
control.
This is an agreement between the Licensee and LECO Corporation
(LECO) of 3000 Lakeview Avenue, St. Joseph, Michigan 49085-2396,
owner of the Licensed Software. This Software License specifies the
conditions under which Licensee may use the Licensed Software.
I. Definitions
"Licensed Software" shall mean the software supplied with this
Software License, which is software developed and distributed by
LECO.
"Instruction Manual" shall mean a guide describing the use and
operation of the Licensed Software, together with any related
supporting documentation.
"Licensee" shall mean and include any of the Licensee's divisions and
departments within Licensee's organization, but shall not include
wholly or partially owned subsidiaries, affiliates, successors or assigns,
or independent third parties.
II. License Grant

LECO hereby grants to Licensee, and Licensee hereby accepts, subject
to the terms and conditions set forth in this Software License, a nonexclusive, non-transferable license to use the Licensed Software and
Instruction Manual as set forth in this Software License. The term
license as used in this Software License shall mean and include:
a. the right to use a copy of the Licensed Software in executable form
by one user at a time;
b. the right to use and copy the Instruction Manual for Licensee's
internal operations; and
c. the right to make one backup copy of the Licensed Software.
In accepting the license granted by LECO, Licensee agrees that it shall
not:
122
CHN628
Introduction
1. transfer or allow transfer of copies of the Licensed Software to any

other party including any wholly or partially owned subsidiaries,
affiliates, successors, or assigns without the express consent of LECO;
2. use the Licensed Software on more than one (1) CPU at any one
time;
3. cause or permit unauthorized copying, reproduction, or disclosure of
any portion of the Licensed Software or Instruction Manual or the
distribution of any part thereof to any third person or entity, for any
purpose whatsoever. This restriction shall continue to bind Licensee
and its agents beyond the termination of this Software License; or
4. attempt to disassemble modify, or reverse engineer the Licensed
Software;
5. attempt to defeat or defeat the copy-protection mechanism;
6. attempt to or access features not purchased.
III. Enhancements And Support

LECO may make available to Licensee updates and enhancements to
the Licensed Software, which Licensee may accept at the time it is
offered to Licensee by paying any applicable update fee. LECO shall
have the sole discretion to determine the update fee. Use of all such
updates and enhancements by Licensee shall be subject to the terms
and conditions of this Software License unless supplemented or
replaced by a subsequent license.
IV. Termination Of Software License

In the event of a material default by Licensee or its agents, of any
provision of this Software License, LECO may terminate this Software
License upon thirty (30) days written notice. Upon termination of the
Software License, the Licensee shall return all copies of the Licensed
Software to LECO. This obligation shall survive the termination of this
Software License.
V. Copyright And Proprietary Information

Licensee acknowledges that the Licensed Software and the Instruction
Manual constitute valuable and copyrighted property of LECO and that
all title and ownership rights in the Licensed Software and related
materials remain exclusively with LECO. LECO reserves all rights with
respect to the Licensed Software and Instruction Manual under all
applicable laws for the protection of proprietary information, including,
but not limited to, trade secrets, copyrights, trademarks, and patents.
Introduction
CHN628
123
VI. Limitation Of Liability And Warranties

With respect to the physical media on which the Licensed Software is
delivered and Instruction Manual, LECO warrants the same to be free
of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ninety (90)
days from the date of delivery. In the event of notification within the
warranty period of defects in material or workmanship, LECO will
replace the defective media or documentation. LECO specifically
disclaims all other warranties, expressed or implied, including but not
limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose with respect to defects in the media and
documentation. In no event shall LECO be liable for any loss of profit,
data, or use, or any other commercial damage, including but not
limited to special, incidental, consequential, interruptions in Licensees
operations, or other damages regardless of negligence or fault. LECO's
liability in connection with this Software License shall not exceed the
value of the amounts paid by Licensee under this Software License for
the Licensed Software which gave rise to the loss less a reasonable
amount for use, damage and obsolescence.
VII. Confidentiality
All information and materials regarding the software, provided to
Licensee by LECO which are not generally known in the trade are
confidential, are proprietary, and such information and materials are
furnished solely for the use of Licensee under this Software License.
Licensee agrees not to use or disclose any such information or material
otherwise without prior written consent from LECO and Licensee
further agrees to take all reasonable steps requested by LECO, or
otherwise necessary to protect the confidentiality of all such
information and materials. The foregoing obligations will survive
termination of this Software License, and Licensee agrees to return all
such information and materials to LECO upon request or any nonrenewal or termination of this Software License.
124
CHN628
Introduction
VIII. Miscellaneous
a) This Software License shall be binding upon and inure to the
benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and
assigns, provided that Licensee shall not have any right to assign its
rights or obligations under this Software License (whether by operation
of law or otherwise) without the prior written consent of LECO.
b) All notices hereunder shall be in writing and shall be sent by
registered or certified mail postage prepaid to LECO at the addresses
first written above. The date of postmark shall be deemed the date on
which such notice is given.
c) No delay on the part of LECO in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any
single or partial exercise of any such right, power or remedy preclude
any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right,
power or remedy.
d) No amendment, modification or waiver of, or any consent with
respect to, any provision of this Software License shall be effective
unless the same shall be in writing and signed and delivered by each
of the parties hereto, and then such amendment, modification, waiver
or consent shall be effective only in the specific instance and for the
purpose for which given.
e) This Software License shall be construed in accordance with and
governed by the internal laws of the State of Michigan. Wherever
possible, each provision of this Software License shall be interpreted in
such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law, but if
any provision of this Software License shall be prohibited by or invalid
under such law, such provision shall be ineffective to the extent of
such prohibition or invalidity, without invalidating the remainder of
such provision or the remaining provisions of this Software License.
f) Licensee agrees that it is responsible for obtaining proper
authorization and complying with any export, re-export, or import laws
or regulations and that may apply if Licensee exports, re-exports, or
imports the Licensed Software, technology or technical data licensed
hereunder.
Introduction
CHN628
125
Equipment Packages
Items listed below are repeated throughout this manual and are
subject to revision. Please consult the packing slip received with the
instrument.
CHN628C Package consisting of: CHN628 Carbon/Hydrogen/Nitrogen
Determinator with External Computer
1
259-077
SOFTWARE KIT 628 SERIES
501-171-HAZ
ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB
501-609-HAZ
REAGENT FURNACE 100/GR
502-174-HAZ
LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500GR
618-380
CASE HOLDER CD-24 BLUE/BLACK*
622-000-000
ASSY CHN628 230V
622-001-232
PACK ACCESSORY CHN628
704-241
ASSY KEY COPY PROTECTION
710-172
MONITOR COLOR 19 FLAT SCR GRY
686-540
ASSY PC TOWER 628 SERIES
*Packed and shipped separately in the U.S.A. Not included with international
shipments due to shipping regulations. These items are essential for operation.
Contact your LECO distributor for quotation and delivery.
CHN628CR Package consisting of: CHN628 Carbon/Hydrogen/Nitrogen

Determinator
1
259-077
SOFTWARE KIT 628 SERIES
501-171-HAZ
501-609-HAZ
502-174-HAZ
618-380
CASE HOLDER CD-24 BLUE/BLACK*
622-000-000
ASSY CHN628 230V
622-001-232
PACK ACCESSORY CHN628
622-001-350
DISK CAL HARDWARE 628 SERIES
704-241
ASSY KEY COPY PROTECTION
126
CHN628
Introduction
Options
1
051-080
SPEC SHEET AUTOLOADER RC/SC/TS
190-998
SCREW CSKH
501-291
REGULATOR OXYGEN
502-397
CUP SAMPLE TIN LARGE 100/PK
502-445-HAZ
PACK TRUESSENTIAL SM TIN CUP
502-446-HAZ
PACK TRUESSENTIAL LG TIN CUP
502-478
SYRINGE 1.0ML 2IN NEEDLE PT 3
502-601
STD AMMONIUM AS N 100 UG/ML 5X10ML VIALS
502-602
STD AMMONIUM AS N 1000 UG/ML 5X10ML VIALS
502-621-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE SML TIN CUP 5K
502-622-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE MED GEL CAP 5K
502-623-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE LRG TIN CUP 5K
502-624-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE SML GEL CAP 5K
502-640-HAZ
PACK TRUESSENTIAL TIN CAP 1K
502-812
STD EDTA CRM
502-818
CAPSULE TIN LIGHTWEIGHT 9.5 X 22MM 50/BX
601-490-110
KIT FOILER
604-492
KIT SAMPLER QUICK MEAT SOLID
617-605
CRUCIBLE AL POROUS LIQ SAMP10P
619-065
TUBE U FURNACE DUAL
619-180-110
KIT CAROUSEL STACKBL 30P
619-316
TUBE GLASS FILTER 2X
619-351-110
KIT CAROUSEL SHORT 30 POS
619-380
ASSY VACUUM HOT HEAD
619-434
ASSY VACUUM HOT HEAD 220V
619-523
ASSY MIRROR AUTOLOADER
619-611
GRINDER ASSY 110V 60HZ
619-612
GRINDER ASSY 230V 50HZ
619-630-110
KIT ASSY LOAD HEAD LIQUID
619-630-120
KIT DUCKBILL & O-RING 50/PK
619-680-101
TRAY VIAL SAMPLE 10/20 ML
619-995
READER BAR CODE CCD USB*
620-632
CARTRIDGE COLOR PRNTR SERIES C
621-376
PURIFIER POWER 7.5KVA/5.25 KW DOMESTIC
625-390-101
BOTTLE WASH 100ML CAPS SEPTA
625-390-102
CORD TENSION LONG FOR INJ HEAD
625-390-103
CORD TENSION SHORT FOR INJ HEAD
625-401-350
AUTOTRANSFORMER 208-230V W/CB DOM*
751-300-160
KIT BALANCE L-250 4 PLC CE
764-216
REGULATOR INERT GAS
Introduction
CHN628
8-32X1.00 ST ZP
127
128
766-036
REGULATOR AIR DBL STAGE
502-040
CAPSULE TIN .250X.625 100/BT
502-040-100
CAPSULE TIN .250X.625 1000/BT
502-167
CAPSULE TIN .343X .750 100/BT
502-186-100
CUP SAMPLE TIN FOIL 1000/BT
502-186-200
502-397-400
CUP SAMPLE TIN LARGE 400/PK
614-961-110
CRUCIBLE POROUS FP-528 10/PK
501-571
CAPSULE COPPER 100/BT
502-008
PLUG TIN 100/BT
501-081
WOOL GLASS 1/LB
501-171-HAZ
501-609-HAZ
502-049
REAGENT N CATALYST 50/GR
502-174-HAZ
502-177
WOOL QUARTZ FINE 50GR
502-188
ALUMINA OXIDE PELLET 200/GM
502-189
COPPER STICKS 100G
502-295
COPPER TURNINGS DEGASSED 100GR
502-304
COPPER STICKS 100G
502-304-500
COPPER STICKS 500G
608-379
STRIP QUARTZ WOOL 15 IN 10/PK
763-265
WOOL GLASS .50/LB
501-050
SAMPLE CARBON 59% 15/GR
501-053
SAMPLE ACETANILIDE CARBON 71% 10/GR
501-441
SAMPLE CALIBRATION CHN 50/GR
502-092
SAMPLE CAL EDTA 50/GM
502-101
SAMPLE DURENE 10/GR
502-211
SAMPLE GLYCINE 99PCT GL 50GR
502-642
STD RM PHENYLALANINE 99% 50G
501-563-150
SAMPLE FLOUR 7% PROTEIN 50/GR
502-055
SAMPLE S IN ORCH LEAVES 20/GR
502-082
SAMPLE SULFUR IN TOBACCO 20GR
502-272
STD PROTEIN IN CORNMEAL GLT 50
502-273
STD PROTEIN IN ALFALFA 50GR
502-274
STD PROTEIN IN WHOLE WHEAT 50G
502-275
STD PROTEIN IN MED RYE FL 50G
502-276
STD PROTEIN IN OAT MEAL 50G
502-277
STD PROTEIN BARLEY FLOUR 50GR
502-278
STD PROTEIN WHITE RICE 50G
502-680
STD RM COAL PROX PLUS LOW
502-681
STD RM COAL PROX PLUS MED
CHN628
Introduction
502-682
STD RM COAL PROX PLUS HIGH
502-683
STD RM MET COKE PROX PLUS
502-684
STD RM PET COKE PROX PLUS
622-001-277
ASSY MIRROR
622-001-357
KIT SPARE PARTS CHN628
502-751-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML TIN FOIL CUP 1K
502-752-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 LRG TIN FOIL CUP 1K
502-753-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML GEL CAP 1K
502-754-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 MED GEL CAP 1K
502-755-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML TIN CAP 1K
502-756-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML TIN FOIL CUP 5K
502-757-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 LRG TIN FOIL CUP 5K
502-758-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML GEL CAP 5K
502-759-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 MED GEL CAP 5K
502-760-HAZ
PACK CONSUMABLE 628 SML TIN CAP 5K
619-680-110G
KIT LIQUID AUTO SAMPLER
051-094
SPEC SHEET 628 SERIES
619-591-933
O-RING 903
104-124-HAZ
KIT PMA CHN/CN/FP628
104-125-HAZ
KIT PMA CHN/CN/FP628 WITH SULFUR
625-602-470
C-FLEX ASSY*
622-001-488
KIT CONVERSION CHN628 TO CN628
764-216-110
KIT REPL REGULATOR INERT GAS W/TC CELL
766-036-110
KIT REPL REGULATOR PRESSURE 2-STAGE AIR
501-291-110
KIT REPL REGULATOR OXYGEN
.301X .429X .064V
Introduction
CHN628
129
Components and Accessories List

Accessory Pack CHN628 (622-001-232)
1
501-241
LUB GREASE VACUUM 5.3 OZ
501-614
SPATULA SAMPLE*
502-007
CLEANER TUBE 8MM X 4FT
502-023
FUNNEL QUICK DISC TUBE
502-049
REAGENT N CATALYST 50/GR
502-092
SAMPLE CAL EDTA 50/GM
502-186-200
502-295
COPPER TURNINGS DEGASSED 100GR
601-691-036
ASSY TUBE CFLEX .125ID X 36
604-378
TWEEZER CURVED SST 3.9*
604-398
SAMPLE HOLDER CUP LARGE
608-379
STRIP QUARTZ WOOL 15 IN 10/PK
614-961-110
CRUCIBLE POROUS FP-528 10/PK
616-152
ASSY TOOL CRUCIBLE EXTRACTOR
616-513
TOOL O-RING
617-441
FILTER SCREEN 100MESH 1.25 SST
619-674
TUBE VENT H2O BAKEOUT
763-265
WOOL GLASS .50/LB
773-942
COMPOUND ANTI SEIZE*
778-321
ASSY TOOL LANCE EXTRACTOR
778-405
ASSY BLOCK CAPSULE STORAGE
789-260
ASSY TOOL WOOL EXTRACTOR
502-189
COPPER STICKS 100G
622-001-258
ASSY FILTER 0.60 MICRON
625-602-470
C-FLEX ASSY*
619-289
TUBE PURGE REAGENT PLT
601-442
O-RING 113
601-504
O-RING 147 2.687X 2.873X.093V
616-138
O-RING 221 1.437X 1.687X.125S
778-116
O-RING 256 5.750X 6.000X.125B
702-557
O-RING 123 1.18X 1.366X .093S
619-316
TUBE GLASS FILTER 2X
203-828
LIT ORGANIC SUPPLIES CAT
130
CHN628
PLT
.562X .748X.093V
Introduction
Component Pack (622-000-070)

1
619-180
ASSY CAROUSEL STACKABLE 30 POS
619-304
ASSY COVER DUST CAROUSEL
619-377
ASSY PLATE BYPASS
620-677
CABLE ASSY CAT 5 15' RJ45 SHLD
762-458
ASSY CONNR NUT 9/16-18/.25CU T
775-303
ASSY CONNECTOR W/RELIEF HELIUM
780-485
ASSY CONNECTOR N2
780-844
ASSY HOSE VESSEL PRESSURE
709-806-720
CORD POWER ASSY 8FT 15A/250V
709-806-808
RECEPTACLE SNGL 15A 250V BLK
709-806-809
COVER RECEPTACLE SNGL SST
619-154
TUBE CATALYST HEATER
617-548
TUBE BOROS FILTER 1.0 X 11.39
619-268
TUBE REAGENT STRAIGHT
200-731
MANUAL INSTR CHN628
PC Tower Assembly (686-540)

1
686-540-101
NAMEPLATE ID FOR 628 SERIES
WARR-365
WARRANTY 12 MONTH STANDARD
686-544
TOWER PC 3.30GHZ T1600 PRECISION
609-787
PACK COMPONENT TWR RECEP/MOUSE
Introduction
CHN628
131
Specifications
Instrument Range at 1 gram*
Carbon: ......................................0.02 to 175 mg
Hydrogen: ...................................0.1 to 12 mg Hydrogen
Nitrogen: ....................................0.04 to 50 mg Nitrogen
Precision Range
Carbon: ......................................0.01 mg or 0.5% RSD, whichever is greater
Hydrogen: ...................................0.05 mg or 1.0% RSD, whichever is greater
Nitrogen: ....................................0.02 mg or 0.5% RSD, whichever is greater
Sample Mass
Up to 250 mg, 100 mg nominal
Readability
0.0001%
Analysis Time
4.5 minutes
Detection Method
Carbon/Hydrogen: ........................Non-Dispersive Infrared (IR) Absorption
Nitrogen: ....................................Thermal Conductivity (TC Cell) Detector
Gases Required
Carrier: .......................................Helium, 99.99% pure @ 35 psi (2.4 bar) 10%
Combustion .................................Oxygen, 99.99% pure @ 35 psi (2.4 bar) 10%
Pneumatic: ..................................Compressed Air @ 40 psi (2.8 bar) 10%, source
must be oil and water free
Furnace
Resistance furnace; both primary and afterburner; up to 1050C
Autoloader
30-position (stackable to 120 samples)
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temp: ..........................15C to 35C (59F to 95F)
Humidity: ....................................20% to 80%, non-condensing
132
CHN628
Introduction
Dimensions**
32 in. H x 27.5 in. W x 30 in D (81 x 70 x 76 cm)
Weight (approximate)
Instrument ..................................273 lb. (124 kg)
Shipping Weight ...........................324 lb. (147 kg)
Electrical Power Requirements
230 V~ (10%; at max load), 50/60 Hz, single phase, 12 A, 4,000 BTU/hr
*Use the following formula to calculate element concentration:

% element concentration = ((absolute element mass in mg)/(sample mass in mg))*100
**Allow a 6-inch (15 cm) minimum access area around all units.
Average output based on nominal operating parameters.
V~ denotes VAC.
Introduction
CHN628
133
This page intentionally left blank.
134
CHN628
Introduction
Installation
This chapter lists step-by-step instructions to install the CHN628
Determinator. For software setup and configuration, refer to System
Setup, page 41.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 22
Instrument Installation .................................................................. 23
International Installation ........................................................... 25
Combustion Tube ................................................................ 25
Crucible Installation ............................................................. 27
Reagent Tube Packing............................................................... 29
Removal ............................................................................ 29
Packing .............................................................................. 29
Installation ......................................................................... 29
Computer Installation .................................................................. 211
Data Transmit Installation ............................................................ 212
Apply Power ............................................................................... 213
Installation
CHN628
21
Illustrations
Figure 2-1 Rear Panel .....................................................................26
Figure 2-2 Lance Installation ...........................................................27
Figure 2-3 Crucible Installation ........................................................28
Figure 2-4 Reagent Tube Packing .....................................................210
22
CHN628
Installation
Instrument Installation
The following procedure should be used for first time installation of the
instrument. This procedure assumes that the instrument has been
unpacked and positioned in its permanent location.
The Balance and Printer are not supplied with the instrument. They
must be purchased separately. Refer to Options, page 127.
Refer to the Facility Requirements diagram, page 26, during
installation of the instrument.
1.
Provide a work surface with convenient electrical power and gas

supplies. Refer to the Facility Requirements diagram, page 26
for power and gas supply requirements.
2.
Install the Instrument as shown in the Facility Requirements

diagram, page 28. Provide a minimum space of six inches
around the instrument for airflow.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD

This equipment operates from a 230V~ source. Contact with
this voltage can be fatal. Do NOT connect the instrument to
the facility power source until instructed to do so.
Installation
3.
Connect the AC power cord, supplied with the instrument, to the

power connector on the rear of the instrument. DO NOT plug it
into facility power. For installation outside the U.S.A. Refer to
International Installation, page 25.
4.
Remove the Incoming Helium Flow Scrubber and Aliquot Dose

Flow Scrubber reagent tubes from the gas panel of the instrument
and pack them. Refer to Reagent Tube Packing, page 29.
5.
Remove the Reduction Heater Tube from the Reduction heater

and pack. Refer to Reduction Heater Tube Packing, page 619.
6.
Install the Computer near the instrument. Refer to Computer

Installation, page 211.
7.
Install the Balance near the computer and instrument. Refer to

Balance Installation, page 33.
CHN628
23
POSSIBLE OPERATOR INJURY

Oxygen is not recommended in the pneumatic systems of
LECO instruments. If a spark is present, an explosion may
result.
8.
Connect the Oxygen Tubing Assembly from the oxygen tank to

the oxygen fitting on the rear of the instrument.
9.
Slide the fitting back from the edge of the tubing and push the
tubing into the oxygen port of the instrument. Then slide the nut
toward the instrument and screw it onto the instrument port.
Tighten the nut.
10. Turn the oxygen gas on at the tank and set it to 35 psi
(2.41 bars).
If the oxygen pressure is set higher than 35 psi (2.41 bars), the
ballast pressure after purging may be too high. This may result in the
software skipping the method burn profile and immediately switching
to maximum flow.
11. Connect the Helium Tubing Assembly from the helium tank to the
helium fitting on the rear of the instrument.
12. Slide the fitting back from the edge of the tubing and push the
tubing into the helium port of the instrument. Then slide the nut
toward the instrument and screw it onto the instrument port.
Tighten the nut.
13. Turn the helium gas on at the tank and set it to 35 psi
(2.41 bars).
If the helium pressure is set higher than 35 psi (2.41 bars), the
depressurization at the beginning of the Helium Leak Check will
happen slowly. This could cause a Failed to Depressurize Leak
Check error.
14. Connect the Pneumatic Tubing Assembly from the pneumatic tank
to the pneumatic in fitting on the rear of the instrument.
15. Slide the fitting back from the edge of the tubing and push the
tubing into the pneumatic port of the instrument. Then slide the
nut toward the instrument and screw it onto the instrument port.
Tighten the nut.
16. Turn the pneumatic gas on at the tank and set it to 40 psi
(2.76 bars).
17. Install a Crucible into the into the combustion tube. Refer to
Crucible Installation, page 27.
DO NOT couple the TC cell and ballast exhaust together. Attach them
to separate exhaust systems.
18. Connect the Ballast Exhaust, on the rear of the instrument, to the
facility exhaust.
24
CHN628
Installation
POSSIBLE OPERATOR INJURY

Ballast exhaust must be exhausted away from the work
area and should not be vented into the lab. Connect the
exhaust ports to the lab exhaust system or a fume hood.
19. Install the Ethernet cable from the computer to the instrument.
20. Plug the instrument into facility AC power DO NOT turn the
instrument on until instructed to do so.
21. This completes instrument installation. Before continuing with
operation, refer to Setup, page 41.
International Installation
For international installation, a HAR approved line cord for use in the
end country must be obtained. This product requires a disconnect
device that may either be the plug of the power cord or a disconnect
device installed at the installation site if the equipment is permanently
wired.
When the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the
disconnect device, the socket/outlet must be installed near the
equipment and shall be easily accessible. When the wiring is
permanently connected, a disconnect device (such as a circuit breaker
or switch) must be lockable, installed near the equipment, and be
easily accessible.
Combustion Tube
The combustion tube supplied in instruments purchased for domestic
use is packed before shipment from the factory. Instruments
purchased for international use may not have the combustion tube
packed. If the combustion tube is not packed, refer to Combustion
Tube Packing, page 629 and pack the combustion tube.
Installation
CHN628
25
Figure 2-1
Rear Panel
26
CHN628
Installation
Crucible Installation
1.
Remove the loading head and set it to the side. Refer to Crucible
Replacement, page 632.
2.
Screw the lance extractor tool, located in the inside front door,
into one of the threaded holes in the lance assembly and remove
the lance assembly.
3.
Insert the crucible extractor tool into a crucible and lower it into
the combustion tube, Figure 2-3, page 28. Rest the crucible on
the quartz wool packing. Release the crucible and remove the
extractor tool.
4.
Hold the lance by the removal tool and carefully lower it in place.
Unscrew the lance extractor tool. The bottom of the lance should
be positioned inside the top of the crucible. On domestic units,
the combustion tube will be installed at time of installation. Verify
crucible position by using the crucible installation tool to find the
height of the crucible edge. Compare the height of the crucible
edge to the length of the lance. Refer to Figure 2-2 .
5.
Reinstall the loading head.
6.
The lance extractor tool should be stored in the inside of the front
door.
LANCE
0.25
CRUCIBLE
Figure 2-2
Lance Installation
Installation
CHN628
27
CRUCIBLE
EXTRACTOR TOOL
CRUCIBLE
LOADING HEAD
INTERFACE BLOCK
Figure 2-3
Crucible Installation
28
CHN628
Installation
Reagent Tube Packing
Anhydrone is a strong dehydrating agent and potentially

strong oxidant (over 150oC). Do not heat with organic
matter, flammables or combustibles. Avoid contact with
strong acids. Refer to material safety data sheet for safe
handling and storage procedures.
Removal
1.
Slide reagent tube upward until the bottom end can swing free.
2.
Tilt out the free reagent tube end.
3.
Pull the reagent tube downward off the top port.
Packing
1.
Insert a screen filter into the bottom of reagent tube. Position the
o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up into the
tube 1/4-inch, Figure 2-4.
2.
Pack 3/4-inch of glass wool into the bottom of reagent tube.
3.
Fill the bottom 1/3 of reagent tube with Anhydrone.
4.
Fill the top 2/3 of reagent tube with Lecosorb.
5.
Firmly pack 1/2 to 2/3-inch of glass wool into the top of reagent
tube.
6.
Reinstall the reagent tube.
7.
Clean excessive reagent from work area.
Installation
Installation
1.
Push the top end of the reagent tube over the top port.
2.
Tilt the reagent tube inward and pull it down, pushing it over the
bottom port.
CHN628
29
763-265
GLASS WOOL
619-268
ALIQUOT DOSE
REAGENT TUBE
502-174
LECOSORB
501-171
ANHYDRONE
617-548
INCOMING
HELIUM SCRUBBER
REAGENT TUBE
763-265
GLASS WOOL
775-306
SCREEN FILTER
Figure 2-4
210
CHN628
Installation
Computer Installation
1.
Unpack the computer, monitor and printer.
2.
Set the computer near the instrument and near the computer set
the monitor and printer.
3.
Connect the power cord, supplied with the monitor, to the power
input jack on the rear of the monitor. Refer to the manual
supplied with the monitor.
4.
Connect the monitor cable, supplied with the monitor, to the

monitor connector on the rear of the computer.
5.
Locate the instrument interface cable and connect it to the

instrument connector (ethernet) on the rear of the computer.
Connect the other end to the computer connector (ethernet) on
the rear of the instrument. Refer to Configuring the Ethernet
Adapter, page 913.
6.
Locate the keyboard, supplied with the computer, and set it in

front of the monitor. Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard
connector on the rear of the computer.
7.
Locate the mouse, supplied with the computer, and set it next to
the keyboard. Connect the mouse cable to the mouse connector
on the rear of the computer. The mouse pad should be positioned
under the mouse.
8.
Connect the power cord, supplied with the printer, to the power
input connector on the rear of the printer. Refer to the manual
supplied with the printer.
9.
Connect the printer cable to the connector on the rear of the

printer. Connect the other end of the printer cable to the printer
connector on the rear of the computer (typically this will be a USB
cable).
10. Locate the copy protection key and plug it into one of the USB
connectors on the back of the computer.
11. Refer to the manual supplied with the printer and install the ink
cartridges in the printer and align them.
12. Turn the computer on and wait for the operating system to load.
Click on the CHN628 icon and follow the registration instructions
that appear on the display. Verify the CNH628 applications
program has loaded and the program appears on the display
before continuing.
13. Align the ink cartridges after the computer and printer have been
turned on. Refer to the manual supplied with the printer for the
alignment instructions.
Installation
CHN628
211
Data Transmit Installation

The data output is RS-232. All character generation is coded in ASCII
or UNICODE format. Special characters (such as expanded print
characters) are filtered out.
212
1.
Connect the data transmit connector on the computer to the

serial connector on the peripheral device.
2.
Configure the instrument's output to match that of the peripheral

device. Refer to Data Transmission Communications Settings,
page 564, for the configuration procedure.
3.
To transmit data automatically, refer to Transmit Data

Automation, page 563.
CHN628
Installation
Apply Power
1.
The Power Switch on the left side of the determinator should be in

the off position.
2.
Turn the Gas Supplies on at the regulators.
In the following steps, the Determinator and Computer must be

turned ON.
Installation
3.
Turn on AC power to the determinator. Permit the computer to

boot-up and run the application program after power is on.
4.
Allow the instrument to stabilize n until TC Cell reading for a two

minute period is + 0.0009, usually about one hour, before
performing a system check or sample analysis.
5.
Access the Ambient Monitor. Refer to Ambient Chart on page 83.
6.
Verify that there are no alarms indicated by an exclamation

marker in a yellow box to the left of the parameter. All alarms
must be cleared before performing a sample analysis. To clear an
alarm it may be necessary to perform hardware calibration,
system maintenance or wait an appropriate amount of time for
the instrument to warm-up. Refer to the Diagnostics and Service
Section of this manual for more information.
CHN628
213
214
CHN628
Installation
Option Installation
This chapter lists step-by-step instructions to install optional
equipment for the CHN628 Determinator. For software setup and
configuration, refer to System Setup, page 41.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 32
Balance Installation ....................................................................... 33
Balance Installation consists of: ................................................. 33
Balance Setup..................................................................... 33
Resetting the Balance .......................................................... 34
Balance Test Procedure ........................................................ 34
Printer Installation.................................................................... 36
Stackable Carousels ...................................................................... 37
Option Installation
CHN628
31
Illustrations
Figure 3-1 Balance Control Panel ......................................................35
Figure 3-2 Carousel Open Position ....................................................37
Figure 3-3 Carousel Bottom Plate .....................................................38
Figure 3-4 Carousel Mounting Position ..............................................38
Figure 3-5 Stacked Carousels ..........................................................39
32
CHN628
Option Installation
Balance Installation
The following procedures should be performed to install the balance.
Refer to the manual supplied with the balance for more information.
The Balance is not supplied with the instrument it must be purchased
separately. Refer to Options, page 127.
The instrument will only support Sartorious four or five place
analytical balances. Other balances may be used; however, LECO is
not responsible for installation or proper operation.
Balance Installation consists of:

Balance SetupInstalling the balance at the location where it will be
used and electrically connecting it to the instrument.
Resetting the BalanceSetting the balance output parameter values to
match those of the instrument's.
Balance Test ProcedureMaking sure the balance operates properly
with the instrument.
Balance Setup
1.
Unpack the Balance and assemble it as shown in the manual

supplied with the balance.
2.
Plug the AC adapter, supplied with the balance, into facility

power. Connect the AC adapter cable to the power-input jack on
the rear of the balance.
3.
Adjust the balance feet to level the balance. The level bubble
should be inside the circle when the balance is level. The level
bubble is located on the rear of the balance.
4.
Connect one end of the balance interface cable to the serial

connector on the computer (COM 1). Connect the other end of
the cable to the balance connector on the rear of the balance.
5.
To properly interface the balance with the analyzer, reset the

balance to the factory defaults. Refer to Resetting the Balance on
the next page.
6.
After the balance is reset, do not change any of the configuration

codes. The balance codes can be changed to custom configure the
balance, if desired, after this procedure is completed and the
balance is operating with the determinator.
Option Installation
CHN628
33
Resetting the Balance

1.
Turn the AC power ON to the balance by pushing the Power

button.
2.
As soon as all the segments on the display light, push the TARE
button. The display will blank for a few seconds and then the
menu code settings will appear.
3.
Press CAL to display 9 in the left digit.
4.
Press PRINT to skip the center digit.
5.
Press CAL to display 1 as the right digit.
6.
Press TARE and hold it for 2 seconds or more. The balance will
reset to the factory set defaults.
7.
Continue with Balance Test Procedure below.
Balance Test Procedure

Refer to Balance Configuration, page 433, and verify the instrument
is properly configured before performing this procedure.
34
1.
Verify the spreadsheet is displayed on the monitor and press the

Print button on the balance. A sample should be logged in and the
weight displayed on the balance entered into the spreadsheet
under mass.
2.
If desired, the sample logged in during this test procedure can be

deleted.
CHN628
Option Installation
Figure 3-1
Balance Control Panel
Option Installation
CHN628
35
Printer Installation
A printer is not supplied with the instrument. It must be purchased
separately. Refer to Options, page 127, for more information.
36
1.
Shut down and turn off the Computer system if necessary.
2.
Unpack the Printer and locate the printer interface cable.
3.
Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the printer and

connect the printer to the computer.
4.
Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the printer.

Install the printer on the work surface and attach all necessary
cables and components.
5.
Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the printer and

install the printer software. This will require turning on the
computer system and printer. It is not necessary to turn on the
instrument at this time.
6.
After the printer is installed and tested turn the computer and
printer OFF.
CHN628
Option Installation
Stackable Carousels
Stacking carousels increase the number of samples that can be
analyzed without operator intervention. Each carousel can hold 29
samples and up to four carousels can be stacked on the loading head.
As samples are analyzed, samples from the upper carousel drop and
fill the lower carousel. Only samples from the lower carousel drop into
the loading head.
1.
Determine the number of carousels that are going to be used and

stacked.
2.
Prepare and weigh 29 samples for the first or bottom carousel.
3.
Looking down into the carousel, turn the bottom plate until hole
number 30 is open. Refer to Figure 3-2 .
Figure 3-2
Carousel Open Position
4.
Option Installation
Insert samples into holes 1 through 29 of the carousel. DO NOT

move the bottom plate. Use this carousel for the first or bottom
carousel only.
CHN628
37
5.
Without moving the bottom plate install the carousel onto the
loading head. The large and small pins on the bottom plate must
align with the holes in the loading head. DO NOT move the
bottom plate to align the holes, move the entire carousel. Refer
to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-3
Carousel Bottom Plate
Figure 3-4
Carousel Mounting Position
38
CHN628
Option Installation
6.
Prepare and weigh up to 29 more samples for the second

carousel.
7.
Looking down into the carousel, turn the bottom plate until hole
number 29 is open.
8.
Insert samples into holes 30 through 28 of the carousel. DO NOT

move the bottom plate.
9.
Without moving the bottom plate, align the standoffs and install
the second carousel on top of the first carousel. The standoff on
the first carousel should be inserted into the hole in the second
carousel directly under the standoff in the second carousel. Refer
to Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5
Stacked Carousels
10. To stack more carousels, repeat steps 7 through 9. For the third
carousel hole 28 should be open and for the fourth carousel hole
27 should be open. As the samples drop into the first carousel
they will be in the correct numerical order.
11. Enter the sample information into the spreadsheet. It will be
necessary to ignore the sample position numbers on the carousels
and number the samples in the spreadsheet from 1 to the highest
sample number in consecutive order.
If operation is intermittent with the weight of 4 carousels, perform
the carousel adjustment procedure on page 933.
Option Installation
CHN628
39
This Page Intentionally Left Blank.
310
CHN628
Option Installation
System Setup
System Setup explains how to set the operating parameters. These
procedures should be done before any samples are analyzed for the
first time per the application.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 44
Front Panel Controls and Functions .................................................. 45
Menu Overview ............................................................................. 47
Database Menu ........................................................................ 47
Edit Menu ................................................................................ 47
View Menu .............................................................................. 48
Samples Menu ......................................................................... 49
Configuration Menu ................................................................ 411
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................... 413
Maintenance Menu ................................................................. 413
Apply Power ............................................................................... 414
Select Language.......................................................................... 415
Determining User Permissions....................................................... 416
Adding User in Windows OS ..................................................... 416
Adding Users to Instrument Software ....................................... 416
Changing Users in Windows OS ................................................ 417
Deleting Users in the Instrument Software ................................ 417
Adding or Changing User Permission for Instrument ................... 418
Display Configuration ................................................................... 420
Main Screen Overview ............................................................ 420
Configure Fields ..................................................................... 421
Configure Font ....................................................................... 422
Create a Dashboard Panel ....................................................... 423
Single Sample Selected ...................................................... 424
Show an Element Plot in the Dashboard .......................... 424
Show element Values in the Dashboard........................... 425
Dashboard Tab Label .................................................... 425
Multiple Samples Selected .................................................. 426
Configure the Dashboard ......................................................... 427
Position a Dashboard ......................................................... 427
Screen Layouts ...................................................................... 428
Hide/Show the Toolbar............................................................ 429
System Setup
CHN628
41
Hide/Show the Status Bar ....................................................... 429

Log Bar ................................................................................. 429
Shortcuts to Move Between Samples ........................................ 430
Go to First Row in the Spreadsheet...................................... 430
Go to Last Row in the Spreadsheet ...................................... 430
Go to Analyze Row in the Spreadsheet ................................. 430
Auto Widths........................................................................... 430
System Configuration .................................................................. 431
System Configuration Definitions.............................................. 432
Balance Configuration ............................................................. 433
Test Commands ................................................................ 434
Barometric Calibration ............................................................ 435
Method Configuration................................................................... 436
Create a Method .................................................................... 436
Edit a Method ........................................................................ 441
Clone a Method ...................................................................... 442
Export a Method..................................................................... 443
Import a Method .................................................................... 444
Delete a Method ..................................................................... 446
Define Calibration Standards ........................................................ 447
Login using Calibration Reference Material ................................. 448
Sample Templates ............................................................. 449
Create a Sample Template ...................................................... 449
Delete a Sample Template....................................................... 450
Edit the Sample Template List............................................. 450
Login using a Sample Template ................................................ 451
Sample Filters ............................................................................. 452
Apply a Filter and Sort Sample Data ......................................... 452
Define a Filter to Apply ........................................................... 453
Automatically Reapply the Sample Filter.................................... 454
User Defined Fields...................................................................... 456
Number Formatting ................................................................ 457
Format Examples .............................................................. 457
Formulas ............................................................................... 458
Formula Examples ............................................................. 458
Managing Databases .................................................................... 459
Using the Start Dialog Box ...................................................... 460
Creating and Retrieving Database Backups ................................ 461
Create Backup .................................................................. 461
Retrieve Backup ................................................................ 462
Selecting a Database Connection.............................................. 462
Adding a Database Connection ................................................. 463
42
CHN628
System Setup
Adding a Connection to an Existing Database ........................ 463

Adding a Connection to a New Database .............................. 464
Deleting a Database Connection ............................................... 465
Validating a Database ............................................................. 466
Reviewing Orphan Objects .................................................. 468
Compacting/Repairing a Legacy Database ................................. 469
Managing Databases for 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance ................... 469
Enabling Logging for an Existing Database ........................... 469
Enabling Logging for a New Database .................................. 471
Database Menu ................................................................. 472
Presentation Time ........................................................ 473
View History ................................................................ 474
Archive Log ................................................................. 475
Adding a Connection to a Log Archive Database .................... 476
Removing Results from a Database ..................................... 476
Disabling Logging on an Existing Database ........................... 477
Deleting Analyzed Samples........................................................... 478
System Setup
CHN628
43
Illustrations
Figure 4-1 Front Panel Controls and Functions ...................................45
Figure 4-2 Burn Profile ....................................................................440
44
CHN628
System Setup
Front Panel Controls and Functions
Figure 4-1
Front Panel Controls and Functions
Number
Item
Description
Quartz Wool Extractor Tool
Used to remove and replace quartz

wool in the combustion tube.
Crucible Extractor Tool
Used to remove and replace the

crucible.
Storage for Lance Assembly
Used to store lance assembly.
Lance Removal Tool
Used to remove the lance assembly.
Catalyst Heater Assembly
Removes oxygen and changes NOx to

N2 before the sample gas enters the
TC cell.
Aliquot Dose Reagent Tube
Purifies the gas leaving the aliquot

doser and catalyst heater by removing
CO2 and moisture.
System Setup
CHN628
45
Number
Item
Description
Furnace Particle Filter

(Empty Except for Screen Filter)
Removes dirt and particles that may

not have been trapped in the furnace
filter.
Furnace Filter
(Empty Except for Screen Filter)
Filters the gases leaving the furnace

and entering the thermoelectric cooler.
Any particles leaving the furnace are
trapped in the filter.
Incoming Helium Scrubber Reagent Tube
Purifies the incoming carrier gas by

removing CO2 and moisture.
10
Loading Head Assembly
During analysis, a sample is placed in

the loading head and automatically
drops into the furnace for analysis.
11
Sample Carousel
Used to load samples for analysis.
46
CHN628
System Setup
Menu Overview
The following are the menu choices in the Windows software. Clicking
on any of these will open another set of menu choices.
Database Menu
Presentation TimeRefer to Presentation Time on page 473.

View HistoryRefer to View History on page 474.
Archive LogRefer to Archive Log on page 475.
Delete by DateRefer to Delete Analyzed Samples on page 478.
ExitUsed to exit the application program and returns to the Windows
Operating System.
Edit Menu
InsertInserts a sample out of sequence, between unanalyzed

samples, into the spreadsheet for analysis. Refer to Insert a Sample,
page 539, for additional information.
FillA group of cells in the spreadsheet can be quickly filled with the
same data. Refer to Fill Cells with the Same Data, page 539, for
additional information.
System Setup
CHN628
47
View Menu
ToolbarToggles the toolbar off or on. Refer to Hide/Show the

Toolbar, page 429, for additional information.
Status BarToggles the status bar off or on. Refer to Hide/Show the
Status Bar, page 429, for additional information.
Log BarDisplays messages that are added to the log file. Refer to Log
Bar, page 429, for additional information.
First RowAutomatically selects the first row of data in the
spreadsheet. Refer to Go to First Row in the Spreadsheet, page 430,
for additional information.
Analysis RowAutomatically selects the analysis row of data in the
spreadsheet. Refer to Go to the Analyze Row in the Spreadsheet, page
430, for additional information.
Last RowAutomatically selects the last row of data in the
spreadsheet. Refer to Go to Last Row in the Spreadsheet, page 430,
New Dashboard PanelPermits the operator to create or edit the
properties of the dashboard. For more information refer to Create a
Dashboard Panel on page 423.
Screen LayoutsPermits the operator to save a screen layout after
configuration. By saving the screen layout the operator can return to a
previous screen layout quickly. Screen layouts can be saved for
specific applications. Refer to Screen Layouts on page 428.
48
CHN628
System Setup
Samples Menu
LoginUsed to login a sample or a standard into the spreadsheet.

Refer to Sample Login, page 518, for additional information.
Login Drift SamplesUsed to log a drift sample into the spreadsheet.
Refer to Sample Login, page 518, and Drift Correction, page 534,
BalanceUsed to enter a mass from the balance into the sample login
screen. Refer to Enter a Mass from the Balance, page 522, for
AnalyzeDisplays the sample login screen to login and analyze a
sample, analyze a standard, or analyze multiple samples. Refer to
Analyze a Sample, page 523, for additional information.
AbortUsed to stop or abort an analysis. Refer to Abort an Analysis,
PauseThe operator can stop or pause analysis at a selected sample
and then resume at a programmed date and time. Refer to Pause
Analysis, page 528, for additional information.
PromoteMoves an unanalyzed sample, within the sample list, up the
list towards the next sample to be analyzed.
System Setup
CHN628
49
Promote: Analyze NextMoves an unanalyzed sample, within the

sample list, up the list and positions it as the next sample to be
analyzed.
DemoteMoves an unanalyzed sample, within the sample list, down
the list towards the last sample to be analyzed.
RecalculateAfter an analysis is complete, recalculate results can be
used to recalculate the result if the extraction data or calibration has
changed. Refer to Recalculate Results, page 540, for additional
information.
TransmitTransmit selected samples and transmits selected analyzed
samples with a data format to a host computer. Refer to Transmit
Selected Samples, page 568, for additional information.
PrintThe print command accesses the report settings dialog box to
print selected sample results on the system printer. Refer to Print
Results, page 545, for additional information.
Print PreviewThe print preview command accesses the report
settings dialog box to preview how selected samples would print on
the system printer.
Print SetupPrint Setup permits the operator to configure the printed
page. The choices and functions will depend on the printer in use.
Text Import DataUsed to import sample data from another software
application. Refer to Import Data, page 559, for additional
information.
Text Export DataUsed to export sample data to another storage
location like a floppy disk. Refer to Export Data, page 549, for
Text Export BuffersUsed to export selected sample plot data to a file
or another application. Refer to Export Buffers, page 558, for
Transfer ExportUsed to Export Sample Data to a File. The file can be
saved on the systems hard drive or transferred to another media for
safe storage. Refer to Transfer Export, page 569, for additional
information.
Transfer ImportUsed to Import Sample Data from a File and restore
it in the spreadsheet. The file had to be saved using Export Sample
Data to a File. Refer to Transfer Import, page 571, for additional
information.
SignUsed to add a signature to a sample that ensures the validity of
the sample information has remained the same since it was signed.
Refer to Sample Signature, page 543, for additional information.
View SignaturesUsed to view a sample signature and determine if it
is valid. Refer to View Signatures, page 544, for additional
information.
DeleteDelete a sample removes a selected sample with sample data
from the spreadsheet. Refer to Delete a Sample, page 540, for
View HistoryUsed to look at a history log of the actions performed on
a selected sample. Refer to View History of a Sample, page 542, for
410
CHN628
System Setup
Configuration Menu
CalibrationMatches the response of the instrument to known

calibration samples. Refer to Calibration, page 530, for additional
information.
From the Calibration fly-out menu the operator can select New
Standard Calibration, page 532, Add Standards, page 533, View
Calibration, page 533, and Edit or Manual Calibration.
BlankDetermines the amount of blank and adjusts the calibration
(area) accordingly. Refer to Blank Calibration, page 531, for
DriftAdjusts the original calibration response to match the current
instrument response. Refer to Drift Correction, page 534, for
From the Drift fly-out menu the operator can select Drift Correction,
page 534, View History, page 536, and Replace Drift Standard, page
537.
IR DetectorsThis procedure permits the operator to adjust the
instruments detector linearity by applying different correction factors
to the detector. Linearizations only affect the linearity of the IR Cells.
Refer to IR Detector Linearization on page 937.
StandardsUsed to enter standards into the calibration standards list.
Refer to Login using Calibration Reference, page 448, for additional
information.
MethodsUsed to create a method for analysis. Refer to Method
Configuration, page 436, for additional information.
System Setup
CHN628
411
CountersAutomatically determines when periodic maintenance is

necessary. Maintenance data that was entered into login periodic
maintenance is used by the counters to determine when maintenance
is necessary. Refer to Configure Maintenance Counters, page 646, for
User Defined FieldsPermits the operator to add a unique field to the
spreadsheet and sample login screen. The field can include a formula
for calculation or contain only test. Refer to User Defined Fields, page
Sample TemplatesA quick way for the operator to login a sample and
enter a method, comment, and description. Create a sample template
is used to develop a specific sample template. After a sample template
is developed, use sample template to login a sample with
predetermined sample analysis data. Refer to Sample Templates, page
SystemConfigure system sets the overall instrument operating
settings to configure the instrument for a specific application or set of
applications. Refer to System Configuration, page 431, for additional
information.
UsersDetermines which operators can use the instrument and what
functions they can use. Refer to Users, page 416, for additional
information.
Transmission FormatsBefore data can be transmitted to a host
computer, the transmitted data format must be configured to match
the host requirements. Use transmission formats to configure data
transmission. Refer to Data Transmit Format Configuration, page
Select LanguagePermits the user to Select Language, page 415, of
the software. A list of available languages will be displayed.
Auto WidthsAutomatically adjusts the width of each cell to fit the
text. For instructions, see Auto Widths, page 430, for additional
information.
DisplaySets the desktop characteristics, as viewed on the computer
monitor. Refer to Sample Display Configuration, page 420, for
Sample FiltersSample Filters is used to display sample data based on
a predefined requirement. Refer to Sample Filters, page 452, for
more information.
412
CHN628
System Setup
Diagnostics Menu
Ambient ChartSelect Ambient Chart to monitor the System Operating

Parameters and display the Ambient Monitor as a Chart and Graph. All
parameters can be displayed. Refer to Ambient Monitor on page 83.
SolenoidsSelect Solenoids to toggle the Solenoid Valves to verify
proper operation, diagnose instrument problems and perform periodic
maintenance. Refer to Solenoids and Switches on page 831.
Leak CheckSelect Leak Check to determine if the instrument has a
helium or carrier gas leak. Refer to Leak Check on page 816.
System CheckSystem check permits the operator to automatically
check Network Communications, Solenoid Operation, Pneumatic
Pressure, System Pressure, Temperature, Gas Flow and IR and TC
Cells. Refer to System Check on page 829.
FurnaceSelect Furnace to test and monitor the Furnace for proper
operation. Refer to Furnace Diagnostics on page 813.
CalibrationSelect Calibration to set the barometric pressure, calibrate
the combustion flow, adjust the TC cell and perform a backup
calibration. Refer to Calibrations on page 87.
NetworkSelect Network to test the Electronic Assemblies and
upgrade Firmware. Refer to Network Diagnostics on page 811.
Maintenance Menu
Log-InUsed to login periodic maintenance after it was performed.

Refer to Login Periodic Maintenance, page 644, for additional
information.
View Log FileThe system will automatically keep a record of various
procedures that were performed. The record can be viewed using view
log file. Refer to View Log File, page 645, for additional information.
Instrument ShutdownUsed to shutdown the instrument.
System Setup
CHN628
413
Apply Power
1.
The Power Switch on the right side of the instrument should be in

the off position.
2.
Connect the Instrument to the proper electrical power source if it

wasnt done during installation. Refer to Instrument Installation,
page 23, for addition information.
3.
Turn the Gas Supplies ON with the regulators at the gas tanks.
The oxygen and helium should be set to 35 psi (2.41 bars). The
pneumatic should be set to 40 psi (2.76 bars).
4.
Turn on AC power to the instrument and computer. Permit the

computer to boot-up and run the application program.
5.
Allow the temperature to stabilize for one hour before performing

a system check or sample analysis.
6.
Access the Ambient Monitor. Refer to Ambient Chart on page 83.
7.
Verify that there are no alarms indicated by an exclamation

marker in a yellow box to the left of the parameter. All alarms
must be cleared before performing a sample analysis. To clear an
alarm it may be necessary to perform hardware calibration,
system maintenance or wait an appropriate amount of time for
the instrument to warm-up. Refer to the Diagnostics and Service
Section of this manual for more information.
POSSIBLE LEAK CHECK ERROR

The furnace temperature must reach the set temperature
and stabilize before performing a leak check. Unstable
furnace temperature may cause erroneous leak check
results.
414
8.
Perform a System Check to determine if the instrument is

operating properly. Refer to System Check on page 829.
9.
Perform a Whole Oxygen Leak Check and a Whole Helium Leak

Check. Refer to Leak Check on page 816.
CHN628
System Setup
Select Language
Select Language permits the operator to select the software language.
The available choices appear on the screen.
Although the language of the software will change, the on-board
manual will remain in English.
The languages displayed on the following screen is used as an example
and may vary from the actual ones displayed on your computer
monitor.
System Setup
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Select Language. The Select

Language dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the language desired.
3.
Click OK. Software will convert to language chosen.
CHN628
415
Determining User Permissions

Users on the Configuration menu helps prevent unauthorized operation
by permitting the system administrator to assign permission for users
to perform selected functions in the instrument software. The following
section explains how to add users to the Windows OS (Operating
System) on the local pc and how to add users to the instrument
through a network/domain login.
Adding User in Windows OS

To add a user, refer to the Windows OS help system as follows:
1.
From the desktop, click Start and then click on Help. Help may be
referred to as Help and Support depending on the Windows OS
that is used.
2.
In the search box, type Users and Passwords.
3.
Make a selection from the Users and Passwords options list, click
Display and follow the instructions provided.
Adding Users to Instrument Software

The following section explains how to add users to the instrument
software. This procedure applies when a user is not assigned in the
Windows OS on the local pc but will be logging onto the instrument
through a network/domain login.
416
1.
On the Configuration menu, click Users. The Users dialog box will
appear.
2.
On the Users dialog box, click Add. The word User will appear
under Name.
3.
Click on User and type in the network/domain login for the user.
If the user identification entered here does not match the
required network/domain login for the user to log on to the pc
from a network, the user will not have the permissions designated
in the software.
4.
Refer to Adding or Changing User Permission, page 418, for

Instrument for instructions to assign permissions to individual
users.
CHN628
System Setup
Changing Users in Windows OS

The following section explains how to change users. This procedure
applies both to users assigned in Windows and to users added to the
instrument on a network/domain login.
1.
Close the software.
2.
On the desktop, click Start and then click Log Off. This step will
vary depending on the Windows OS that is used.
3.
Enter the username and password to log on the new user. This
step will vary depending on the Windows OS that is used.
4.
Log in to the instrument.
Deleting Users in the Instrument Software

Only users added to the instrument on a network/domain login can be
deleted. Users assigned in the Windows OS cannot be deleted from the
Users dialog box.
System Setup
1.
Click Configuration and select Users. The Users screen will

appear.
2.
Click on the name to be deleted and then click Delete. A message

dialog box will appear.
3.
Click Yes to delete the username; click No to keep the username.
CHN628
417
Adding or Changing User Permission for Instrument

Users names will appear in the Name column of the Users dialog box.
The current user logged into the Windows system will display in blue.
1.
Click Configuration and select Users. The Users screen will

appear.
A.
To disable all user permissions for a specific user, place a X

in the Guest column. When the user logs on to the system
they will be considered a Guest and will have READ-ONLY
access to the software. For Guest users, the check boxes
listed on the User Properties dialog will be cleared as they
cannot perform any of the tasks listed.
B.
Select the Enable User Permissions check box and user

permissions will be checked during the operation of the
instrument. When the Enable User Permissions checkbox is
cleared, user permissions are not checked and all users can
perform any function on the instrument.
2.
To assign user permissions, click on the name of a user.
3.
If one user requires the exact same permissions as a user that

already has permissions assigned, the Same As column can be
used to save time.
A.
4.
418
Select the name of the user to add or change permission by

clicking in the Row column for that user.
B.
Single-click in the Same As column.
C.
From the list, select the name of the user that already has
the same permissions assigned.
Click Properties. The User Properties dialog box will appear.
CHN628
System Setup
System Setup
5.
Select the desired check boxes to assign or remove user

permission for the functions listed in the edit box. When an X
displays, the user has permission to perform that function.
6.
Click OK when finished assigning permissions.
CHN628
419
Display Configuration
Main Screen Overview
The main screen appears when the determinator and computer are
powered-up. A screen example of the default configuration is shown
below. Like many Windows based programs, the screen can be
configured by the operator as desired. Screen layouts or configurations
can be saved and recalled.
420
CHN628
System Setup
Configure Fields
System Setup
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Display. The Sample Display

screen will appear.
2.
Click Fields to display or hide a field.
3.
To show an invisible field, select the field to display and click

Show.
4.
To hide a visible field, select the field to hide and click Hide.
5.
To change the order of fields shown on the spreadsheet, in the

Fields List box select the field to move and click either Promote or
Demote.
6.
Click Default to list the default fields as Visible Fields.
7.
Click in the Locked Columns box and enter the number of

columns to lock in place. The columns are numbered from top to
bottom under visible fields. When a column is locked it wont
move position in the spreadsheet.
CHN628
421
Configure Font
422
1.
Click Font to change the font name, style, size, and color. The
Font configuration screen will appear.
2.
From the Font configuration screen select the Font Name, Style
and Size. A sample of the selected Font will appear in the Sample
Text preview box.
CHN628
System Setup
Create a Dashboard Panel

The Dashboard Panel can display an element plot or element values.
Refer to Single Sample Selected on page 424.
The dashboard display will automatically change depending on the
number of samples selected. Refer to Multiple Samples Selected on
page 426.
System Setup
CHN628
423
Single Sample Selected

Show an Element Plot in the Dashboard
424
1.
From the View menu, click New Dashboard Panel. A new

dashboard will be created and the dashboard configuration dialog
box will appear.
2.
Click Show Plot on the left side of the screen.
3.
Click Add in the Plot Options dialog box. A list of elements will
appear. Select the element to plot and click OK. A new plot will
appear.
4.
Click the drop down arrow and select the Reporting Units for the
element to plot.
5.
Click the drop down arrow and select the Plot Pattern.
6.
Click Plot Color and select the plot color.
7.
Click Y-Axis to select the Y-Axis to display. Selections: None, Left

or Both.
8.
Click OK to save the dashboard configuration.
CHN628
System Setup
Show element Values in the Dashboard

1.

box will appear.
2.
Click Show Values on the left side of the screen.
3.
Click OK to save the dashboard configuration.
Dashboard Tab Label

Click inside the Tab Label edit box and enter a name that will appear in
the tab for the created dashboard.
System Setup
CHN628
425
Multiple Samples Selected

1.

box will appear.
2.
Use the dialog box on the right to select the information shown in
the dashboard. Selections are:
Control Chart with StatisticsA chart with plotted sample
values in addition to the average value, standard deviation,
relative standard deviation and the number of samples
selected.
Control ChartA chart with plotted sample values.
StatisticsThe average value, standard deviation, relative
standard deviation and the number of samples selected.
426
3.
Overlaid PlotsPlots of each selected sample in the same

dashboard.
4.
Click the drop down arrow in the Stats to Display selection box
and select the desired statistics shown in the dashboard.
5.
Click the Label Stats Points check box to label the sample points
on the chart. The numbers that appear with the point are the
sample numbers selected.
6.
Click inside the Significant Digits selection box to select the

statistics number format.
CHN628
System Setup
Configure the Dashboard

To configure the dashboard, right click on the dashboard to display the
configuration menu.
ZoomPosition the mouse cursor over the area of a plot to zoom in.
Hold the left mouse button in and draw a box. The area inside the box
will be magnified. Draw another box to zoom in farther. Click Zoom
Out One Level to reduce the magnification by one level. Click Zoom
Out to zoom out all levels and return to the original plot.
Label PointsLabel points will place the sample number near the point
on a control chart. Select multiple samples. Right click the desired
dashboard and select Label Points.
StatisticsStatistics will display a control chart or multiple plots.
Select multiple samples. Select statistics to display a control chart.
Deselect statistics to display multiple plots.
Auto Independent ScaleWhen multiple selected plots are scaled
differently, Auto Independent Scale rescales the plots so they can be
compared together. Select Auto Independent Scale to rescale plots.
PropertiesDisplays the Dashboard Properties dialog box for advanced
configuration or creation of a new dashboard. Refer to Create a
Dashboard on page 423.
Position a Dashboard
Move the mouse pointer over the dashboard tab and hold the left
mouse button down. Move the mouse to position the dashboard on the
main screen.
To size the dashboard, move the mouse over the splitter bars and hold
the left mouse button down. Move the mouse to move the splitter
bars.
Refer to Main Screen Overview on page 420.
System Setup
CHN628
427
Screen Layouts
After the Sample Grid and Dashboard are configured they can be
saved as a layout. By saving the layout youre always assured you can
restore the configuration if its lost.
1.
Configure the main screen as desired. Refer to Display

Configuration on page 420.
2.
Click the View menu and select Screen Layouts. The Screen
Layouts Screen will appear.
3.
Click Save and enter a unique name for the current screen layout.
4.
Click Close to exit and save the screen layout.
MoveSelect a screen layout and click Move Up or Move Down to

move a selected screen layout up or down the list.
DeleteSelect a screen layout and click Delete to remove a screen
layout from the list. After a screen layout has been removed it cannot
be restored.
SelectPermits the operator to select a new screen layout. Highlight
the desired screen layout and click Select. Click Close to exit.
CloseClick Close to exit screen layouts.
DefaultClick Default to return to the factory default screen. Click
Close to exit.
428
CHN628
System Setup
Hide/Show the Toolbar

If desired, the toolbar can be turned off or turned back on. The
toolbar, located at the top of the screen, is a quick way to perform
menu functions without accessing the menus.
From the View menu, click Toolbar. A check indicates the toolbar
will be displayed.
Hide/Show the Status Bar

If desired, the status bar can be turned off or turned back on. The
status bar, located at the bottom of the screen, will show operational
functions of the instrument as they are currently in progress.
From the View menu, click Status Bar. A check indicates the
status bar will be displayed.
Log Bar
The log bar, located at the bottom of the screen, displays information
saved in the log file. It only appears when it displays information. This
information may be communication failures, severe errors or
operational procedures.
If Log Bar is not checked it will only display communications failures
and severe errors.
If Log Bar is checked it will display any information saved in the log
file. This includes communications failures, severe errors and
operational procedures.
Examples of operational procedures are sample data changes,
calibration changes, change to the sample mass and more.
System Setup
CHN628
429
Shortcuts to Move Between Samples

Go to First Row in the Spreadsheet
The first row in the spreadsheet can be quickly selected.
1.
From the View menu, click First Row.
2.
The cursor will automatically jump to the first row.
Go to Last Row in the Spreadsheet

The last row in the spreadsheet can be quickly selected.
1.
From the View menu, click Last Row.
2.
The cursor will automatically jump to the last row.
Go to Analyze Row in the Spreadsheet

The analyze row is the row in the spreadsheet that contains the next
sample to be analyzed. This row can be quickly selected.
1.
From the View menu, click Analyze Row.
2.
The cursor will automatically jump to the analyze row.
Auto Widths
430
1.
Select the Configuration menu
2.
Click Auto Widths to adjust the size of each cell in the sample
display to fit the text inside the cell.
CHN628
System Setup
System Configuration
System configuration permits the operator to set the overall
instrument operating settings and parameter values for a desired
application.
System Setup
1.
From the Configuration menu, click System. The System

Configuration dialog box will appear.
2.
Set the system parameters using the default values as a general

guideline. Special settings for certain applications may be entered
at this point.
3.
After entering all information, click OK.
CHN628
431
System Configuration Definitions

Gas Conservation TimeoutThe time in minutes, after analysis, when
the instrument automatically switches to the gas conservation mode.
Range: 1 to 600, Default: 15 minutes.
Auto Increment Sample NameWhen enabled, if the file name ends
with a number, it will incremented every time a new sample is logged
in.
Nominal MassThe mass value that will automatically appear during
login. Typically, the blank mass value is 1.0 gram.
Sample LoadingPermit the operator to select how samples are
loaded into the determinator. The following selections are available:
ManualManual should be selected if samples are going to be

manually dropped into the loading head. When manual is
selected the autoloader (carousel) or liquid injector is not used.
CarouselsCarousels should be selected if the autoloader

(carousel) is used. Select the number of carousels in use.
Selections: 1 through 4.
Furnace Standby TemperatureSelects the combustion furnace

temperature during gas conservation. Range 650 to 950 C. Reducing
the furnace temperature during standby will increase the life of the
combustion furnace and associated components.
432
CHN628
System Setup
Balance Configuration
Balance Configuration permits the operator to select the desired
balance parameter values to properly accept the balance's data.
The instrument will only support Sartorious four or five place
analytical balances. Other balances may be used; however, LECO is
not responsible for installation or proper operation.
For more information on Balance Configuration Definitions, see the
Glossary, page 121.
System Setup
1.
Set the instrument power switch to the On position.
2.
Turn the power On to the balance by pushing the power on

button, Figure 3-1, page 35.
3.

Configuration window will appear.
4.
Click the Balance tab.
CHN628
433
5.
6.
Enter the following parameter values. Refer to the Glossary,

page 121 for balance configuration definitions.
Port
COM1 (serial)
Baud Rate
1200
Data Bits
Parity
Odd
Stop Bits
Readability
Balance Mode
Normal
Send Command
<ESC>P<CR><LF>
Tare Command
<ESC> T
When finished, click OK.
Test Commands
SendUsed to test the balance interface. Click Send to send a weight
from the balance to the system and display the weight in the
spreadsheet.
TareUsed to test the balance interface. Click Tare to set the weight
displayed on the balance to zero.
434
CHN628
System Setup
Barometric Calibration
Barometric Calibration sets the instrument's barometer to the current
barometric pressure. An accurate, local, barometric pressure value
must be available to perform this procedure. Refer to Barometric
Pressure page 79, for additional information.
Changes in barometric pressure will affect gas volume. For this reason,
the correct barometric pressure must be manually entered to obtain
the most accurate results.
1.
From the Diagnostic menu, click Calibration. The Hardware

Calibration dialog box will appear.
2.
Click inside the barometric Pressure value box, located to the left
of the Set Pressure button, and enter the current barometric
pressure.
Use values in mm Hg for barometric pressure.
System Setup
3.
Click the Set Pressure button to enter the current barometric

pressure.
4.
Close the Hardware Calibration dialog box.
CHN628
435
Method Configuration
A method is a set of analytical parameters used to control the
instrument during analysis and calculation of the final result. Before
analysis, a method must be created or the default method used.
Create a Method
436
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Method. The Method dialog

box will appear.
2.
Click Add to create a method. A row will be added to the bottom

of the spreadsheet. You can also click an empty row and enter a
method name.
CHN628
System Setup
3.
Click Properties. The Analysis Parameters dialog box will appear.
A.
Enter the desired analysis property values.
B.
Click OK when finished.
Although most official methods state 850oC as the acceptable

temperature for combustion in the primary furnace, LECO
recommends 950oC to achieve the highest level of sample oxidation.
System Setup
CHN628
437
438
C.
Click the Element Parameters tab to display the element

properties dialog box.
D.
Enter the desired element property values.
E.
CHN628
System Setup
F.
Click the Burn Profile tab to display the burn profiles

properties dialog box.
The purpose of the burn profile is to achieve complete combustion,

before filling the ballast volume, in the least amount of time with the
most efficient use of oxygen. Rapidly combustible materials, such as
sucrose, grains, and oils require a high initial flow to prevent
incomplete combustion. Materials that burn slower require a medium
initial flow until reaching combustion temperature.
To avoid incomplete combustion of the sample, it is recommended to
start with a high flow, then decrease to medium flow. Low or erratic
answers, or, in extreme cases, the presence of soot in the lance or
filter tube may indicate incomplete combustion. The burning sample
may be observed through the sample drop block during combustion.
The tin capsule generally burns intensely after the sample is gone.
To select the flow rate and time period for each flow, refer to Create a
Method, page 436.
Figure 4-2 shows a typical burn profile. Flow 1 is set at high for 30
seconds. Flow 2 is set at low for 30 seconds. Flow 3 is set at high until
end of analysis.
For Burn Profile definitions, refer to the Glossary, page 121.
G.
System Setup
CHN628
439
HIGH
4 LPM
NONE = 0 LPM
LOW = 0.3 LPM
MED = 1 LPM
HIGH = 4 LPM
MAX = ALL FLOWS ON
MED
1 LPM
BURN 1
BURN 2
Figure 4-2
Burn Profile
440
H.
Click the Macro Ballast tab to display the micro ballast

properties dialog box. For Macro Ballast definitions, refer to
the Glossary, page 121.
I.
For Equilibrate Time, enter the time period for gases in the
ballast to mix after it is filled.
J.
Enter the desired Macro Ballast property values.
K.
Click OK when finished For Analysis and Element Parameter

definitions, refer to the Glossary, page 121.
CHN628
System Setup
Edit a Method
Using this procedure you can also edit the method list.
System Setup
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Method. The Method screen

will appear.
2.
Select the Method to be edited.
3.
Click Properties to change the method properties. Refer to Create

a Method page 436.
4.
To move a selected method up towards the top of the list select it

and click Promote.
5.
To move the selected method down towards the bottom of the list
select it and click Demote.
6.
Select Ascending to list the method in ascending alphabetical

order.
7.
Select Descending to list the method in descending alphabetical

order.
8.
Click OK to save any changes and exit.
CHN628
441
Clone a Method
After a method is cloned the name and desired parameters can be
changed to create another method.
442
1.

will appear.
2.
Select a method to clone by clicking on the method row.
3.
Click Clone to add another method to the method list with the
same method parameters as the selected method.
4.
Click the cloned method name and change it to make it different

from the selected method.
5.
Click OK to exit and save the cloned method.
CHN628
System Setup
Export a Method
Export a Method permits the operator or manager to copy a method to
a file. The method can be saved on the systems hard drive or
transferred to another media for safe storage. If necessary, the
method can be imported to the same instrument or transferred to
another CHN628 instrument. Refer to Import a Method on page 444.
System Setup
1.
Click the Configuration menu and select Method. The Method

screen will appear.
2.
Select the method to export by clicking on it. An asterisk will

appear next to the selected method.
3.
Click Export. The export method selection screen will appear.
CHN628
443
4.
Select the folder to store the method in. The method name will
appear as the file name. Do not enter an extension. The software
will automatically add the proper file extension.
5.
Click Save to copy the method to the selected file.
Import a Method
Import a Method transfers an exported method to an instrument and
adds it to the method list. A method can be imported that was
developed on the present instrument or another CHN628 instrument.
1.
444
Click the Configuration menu and select Method. The Method

screen will appear.
CHN628
System Setup
System Setup
2.
Click Import to import a saved method. The import method file

selection screen will appear.
3.
Select the Method File to import.
4.
Click Open. The method will be added to the analysis method list.
CHN628
445
Delete a Method
If a method is deleted using this procedure, all samples and

calibrations associated with the method are also deleted.
Once a method is deleted it cannot be restored.
446
1.

will appear.
2.
Select a method to delete by clicking on the method row.
3.
Click Delete to delete the selected method from the method list. A
confirmation dialog box will appear.
4.
Click Yes to delete the selected method.
CHN628
System Setup
Define Calibration Standards

Define Calibration Standards creates a list of calibration standards and
their values for use during calibration and drift correction.
LECO recommends that certified reference materials be used for
calibration development on the CHN628.
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Standards. The Standards

2.
Click Fields to edit the displayed fields or columns on the

Standards screen.
3.
Click Add to list a standard. A row will be added to the bottom of

the spreadsheet.
4.
Click the row and enter a standard name, value, lower control
limit (LCL) and upper control limit (UCL).
The lower control limit, or LCL, is the minimum standard result
value that will allow analysis to continue. If the standard result is
below the lower control limit, a notice will appear and analysis
will stop, permitting the operator to make corrections and then
restart the analysis.
The upper control limit, or UCL, is the maximum standard result
value that will allow analysis to continue. If the standard result is
above the upper control limit, a notice will appear and analysis
will stop, permitting the operator to make corrections and then
restart analysis.
If an LCL or UCL value is not entered analysis will continue
regardless of the result data.
System Setup
5.
To move a selected standard up towards the top of the list select

it and click Promote.
6.
To move the selected standard down towards the bottom of the

list select it and click Demote.
7.
Select Ascending to list the standard in ascending alphabetical

order.
8.
Select Descending to list the standard in descending alphabetical

order.
9.
CHN628
447
Login using Calibration Reference Material

Before a sample can be analyzed as a standard it must be added to
the Standards List. Refer to the Glossary, page 121,for calibration
standards definitions.
448
1.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample Login dialog
box will appear.
2.
Click the drop down arrow, in the sample name selection box, and
select a defined Standard from the list.
3.
Enter the information required in the Login Screen.
4.
Click OK to login the standard.
CHN628
System Setup
Sample Templates
Sample Templates is a quick way for the operator to login a sample
and enter a method, comment, and description.
Create a Sample Template
System Setup
1.
An analysis method should be developed before a sample is

logged in. Refer to Create a Method on page 436.
2.
From the Configuration menu, click Sample Templates. The

Sample Templates screen will be displayed.
3.
Click Add to create a method. A row will be added at the bottom

of the list. Enter a method name.
4.
To change the name, select the default name by clicking the

name and entering a new name.
5.
Click the method cell and enter a method.
6.
Click the comments cell and enter any comments.
7.
Click the description cell and enter a description.
8.
CHN628
449
Delete a Sample Template

1.
From the Configuration menu, click Sample Templates. The

Sample Templates screen will appear.
2.
Select the Sample Template to delete.
3.
Click Delete. The Sample Template Delete screen will appear.
4.
Click Yes to delete the sample template or No to exit without

deleting the sample template.
Edit the Sample Template List
450
1.
Select a Sample Template and click Promote to move a selected

method up towards the top of the list.
2.
Select a Sample Template and click Demote to move the selected

method down towards the bottom of the list
3.
Select Ascending to list the transmission formats in ascending

alphabetical order.
4.
Select Descending to list the transmission formats in descending

alphabetical order.
5.
Select a Sample Template and click Delete to remove it from the

sample template list.
CHN628
System Setup
Login using a Sample Template

1.
box will appear.
2.
Click the drop down arrow to the right of sample name and enter
the desired sample name from the drop down list. The sample
name, method comments, and description will automatically be
entered into the spreadsheet.
3.
Continue with sample login and enter the other necessary

information.
Refer to Sample Login for additional information.
System Setup
CHN628
451
Sample Filters
Sample filters permits the operator to sort and display sample data
based on a predefined requirement. Fields can be selected to display a
certain name or value. Fields can also be mathematically compared
and displayed according to a requirement.
There are three predefined fields:
All Samplesdisplays all the sample data in the database.
Todays Samplesdisplays all samples run today.
Method samplesdisplays all the samples run using Method-1.
Apply a Filter and Sort Sample Data

1.
From the Configuration menu, click Sample Filters. The Sample

Filters dialog box will appear.
The filters All Samples and Todays Samples will always appear. In
addition, a filter will appear for each defined method.
452
2.
Select a sample filter and click OK. The dialog box will disappear
and the sample grid will reappear with the filter applied.
3.
Click Cancel to exit without applying the filter.
CHN628
System Setup
Define a Filter to Apply
System Setup
1.

Filters Selection dialog box will appear.
2.
Click Add to define and add a sample filter to the list. A new filter
with the filter name New Filter will be added to the list.
3.
To define the new filter select New Filter and click Properties. The
Properties Dialog Box will appear.
4.
From the Properties Dialog Box you can define the filter.
5.
Click the Filter Name to enter and change the filter name. This is
the name that will appear in the Sample Filter Selection dialog
box.
CHN628
453
6.
Click the cell under Field and enter a sample field to sort. As
examples, you can sort on s sample name or method. A drop
down arrow will appear. Select the desired field from the list.
7.
Click the cell under With to sort the field name with. As an
example, the field name can be sorted with a specific sample
name. Equal will automatically appear in the Compare field.
8.
If you enter a numeric value in the With field click the compare
cell and enter the desired operator. Operators are; equal, greater
than, greater than or equal, less than, or less than equal. The
filed name will be sorted with the value using the compare
operator.
9.
Select a filter and click Fields to select the fields to display when
the filter is used.
10. Select a filter and click Delete to delete the filter.
Automatically Reapply the Sample Filter

Automatically Reapply Sample Filter is used to reapply a defined
sample filter at a predetermined time and frequency.
For example, If you create a filter that displays samples from the
previous 30 days, it will show samples from the last 30 days when its
first applied. If its not reapplied, samples that originally matched the
filter plus all the new samples will be added to the spreadsheet. To
prevent this from happening, automatically reapply the filter every
day, preferably at a time when the instrument isnt being used.
454
1.

2.
Select the filter to automatically apply and click Properties. The

3.
Check Automatically Reapply Sample Filters.
4.
Enter the time, date and update frequency.
CHN628
System Setup
System Setup
1.

2.

Filters Selection dialog box will appear.
3.
Select the filter to automatically apply and click Properties. The

4.
Check Automatically Reapply Sample Filters.
5.
Enter the time, date and update frequency.
CHN628
455
User Defined Fields

The User Defined Fields allows customized fields to be added to the
spreadsheet. User defined fields can display results from functions or
they can display customized text such as notes or comments.
1.
From the Configuration menu, click User Defined Fields.
2.
Create or modify a user field as follows:

To create a user field, click Add. A new row will be inserted into
the table.
To modify a user field, select the desired user field in the table.
To delete a user field from the table, select the row of the desired
user field and click delete.
3.
Complete the table for the new or revised user field as follows:
Select the Read Only check box to prevent the user field from
being edited in the spreadsheet.
Select the Numeric check box to restrict text and only display
numeric values.
For Format, enter a format to determine how the result of the
user defined field displays in the spreadsheet. Refer to Number
Formatting, page 457.
For Formula, enter a formula to use if the field will be used for a
calculation. Refer to Formulas, page 458.
Select the Login check box and the field will appear in the Login
Sample dialog box. Refer to Sample Login, page 518.
Select the Stats check box and statistics will be available in the
Dashboard Properties dialog box as a value you can add when
you select Show Value and then Add. Once selected as a Show
Value, it is displayed on the dashboard. Refer to Configure
Dashboard, page 427. When selected, both Read Only and
Numeric are automatically selected.
Select the Standard check box and the user defined field can be
used as a standard, which means the standard can define its
value and range, and can be calibrated.
456
CHN628
System Setup
Number Formatting
Use the Format column in the User Defined Field dialog box to enter a
number format. This format determines how the result of the user
defined field appears in the spreadsheet. The following section
provides examples of formats and how the result will display
depending on which format is utilized.
Format Examples
*Format Type
Number
Format for Result
Result
4.50360
4.50360000
0.123456
F4.5
0.1235
0.000789
F3.5
0.00079
0.000789
F3.2
0.00
321.8765
F3.5
322
0.123456
S4.5
1.235E-1
0.000789
S3.5
7.9E-4
0.000789
S3.2
0.0E-1
321.8765
S3.5
3.22E+2
0.123456
E4.5
123.5E-3
0.000789
E3.5
790E-6
0.000789
E3.2
000E-3
321.8765
E3.5
322E+0
321.8765
I2
322
Fn.m
Sn.m
En.m
In
*
A = Default format
n = Total number of significant digits to be represented
m = Maximum number of digits after the decimal to define readability
I = Integer
S = Scientific notation: An exponential format (y.yyy x 10e) in which any number
is expressed as a number between 1 and 10 multiplied by a power of 10 that
indicates the correct position of the decimal in the original number.
E = Engineering format: An exponential format that displays the exponent in
multiples of 3.
F = Fixed point format: A format in which the decimal point is located at a single
unchanging position in a predetermined number of digits.
System Setup
CHN628
457
Formulas
Formulas can be entered into the Formula column of the User Fields
dialog box and are used to calculate the result. The following section
provides some example formulas and the result based on their
calculation.
Formula Examples
* Function Type
Example Function
Result
[Column Heading of
Desired Analyte Value]
[Carbon %]
Analyte concentration
value
@ABS(exp)
@ABS([Carbon %]-[Carbon Blank])
Absolute value
@Log10(exp)
@Log10([Carbon ppm])
Log base 10
@Ln(exp)
@Ln([Carbon %])
Natural log
@SQRT(exp)
@SQRT([Carbon %])
Square root
@Maximum(exp1,exp2)
@Maximum([Carbon %],[Carbon
Blank])
Finds Maximum
@Minimum(exp1,exp2)
@Minimum([Carbon %],[Carbon
Blank])
Finds Minimum
@IF(cond, true, false)
@IF([Carbon ppm]>5,[Carbon ppm],0)
If the Carbon ppm value

is > 5, the Carbon ppm
value will display,
otherwise 0 will display
@AND(cond1, cond2)
@IF(@And([Carbon %]>0.01,[Nitrogen
%]>0.01), 1, 0)
If both Carbon and

Nitrogen % are > 0.01,
1 will display, otherwise
0 will display
@OR(cond1, cond2)
@IF(@Or([Carbon %]>0.01,[Nitrogen
%]>0.01), 1, 0)
If either Carbon or
Nitrogen % are > 0.01,
1 will display, otherwise
0 will display
@IF(@XOr([Carbon %]>0.01,[Nitrogen
%]>0.01), 1, 0)
If JUST Carbon % or
JUST Nitrogen % is >
0.01 (not both), 1 will
display, otherwise 0 will
display
@XOR(cond1, cond2)
exp = expression. Used to specify a field value or perform a calculation on field

values. May be a single number or a function that returns a number.
cond = condition. Used for comparisons based on a single condition or multiple
conditions.
458
CHN628
System Setup
Managing Databases
Over time the instrument database can accumulate a great deal of
information. It is good practice to establish a regular database backup
procedure. Refer to Creating and Retrieving Database Backups, page
461.
LECO software applications use a database to store and maintain all
the information necessary to run the instrument, including methods,
standards, system parameters, and sample results. A file system
database is created automatically the first time the software is started.
In addition, a database connection that contains the name and location
of the database is created. The database connection is used to specify
which database to open.
LECO software provides the means to create and maintain the
instrument database and database connections. A database
management wizard allows you to add database connections, to select
a database connection for use, and to delete database connections.
When you add a connection, it can be to a new database or to an
existing database. The new connection name is added to the list of
available database connections.
For 21 CFR Part 11 compliance, logging can be enabled when a
database connection is created. When logging is enabled, Presentation
Time, View History, and Archive Log appear on the Database menu in
the instrument software.
This section explains the following topics:
Using the Start Dialog Box, page 460
Creating and Retrieving Database Backups, page 461
Selecting a Database Connection, page 462
Adding a Database Connection, page 463
Deleting a Database Connection, page 465
Validating a Database, page 466
Compacting/Repairing a Legacy Database, page 469
Managing Databases for 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance, page 469
Enabling Logging for an Existing Database, page 469
Enabling Logging for a New Database, page 471
Presentation Time, page 473
View History, page 474
Archive Log, page 475
Adding a Connection to an Archive Log Database, page 476
Removing Results from Database, page 476
Disabling Logging on an Existing Database, page 477
System Setup
CHN628
459
Using the Start Dialog Box

The following section explains how to use the Start dialog box in order
to add a new database connection, select and, optionally, validate an
existing connection, or delete a database connection. A compact/repair
selection is available for legacy databases.
1.
Exit the instrument software.
2.
Click Start on the Windows desktop, select Programs, select

LECO, select the instrument, and then click Database
Management. The Start dialog box will appear.
When database connections are created, they will appear under

Connections. The file path for the selected database connection
appears at the bottom of the Start dialog box. Database connections
that are no longer valid appear with dimmed text in the Connections
list. When the user selects a dimmed connection, the software allows
the user to delete the database connection or to reconnect to the
database.
Click Add to add a database connection. Refer to Adding a Database
Connection, page 463.
Or
Click on an existing database connection and then make one of the
following selections:
460
Click Select to connect to a database that already exists. Refer to

Selecting a Database Connection, page 462.
Click Validate to validate the database with which the connection

corresponds; however, Select must also be selected to perform
validation. Refer to Validating a Database, page 466.
CHN628
System Setup
Click Delete to remove a database connection. Refer to Deleting a

Database Connection, page 465.
Compact/Repair is not necessary for file system databases (and

does not appear on the Start dialog box); however, it is available
for Legacy Databases. Click Compact/Repair to compact an existing
Legacy Database to conserve disk space and to repair a possibly
corrupted Legacy Database. Refer to Compacting/Repairing Legacy
Database, page 469.
Creating and Retrieving Database Backups

It is good practice to routinely back up data to prevent data loss in the
event something such as a hard drive failure should occur. The
following procedure explains how to backup a database and should be
performed on a regular basis. This procedure applies for all databases
whether or not logging is enabled.
Create Backup
System Setup
1.
In the Start dialog box, highlight the database connection of the

database to back up. The file location of the corresponding
database will appear as shown below.
2.
Close the instrument software.
3.
To locate the files for the database connection, right-click on Start

on the desktop and use the Windows Start Menu to navigate to
the folder location.
4.
Select the folder and click Copy.
5.
Paste the files to the desired storage media (e.g., CD, USB
external drive, etc.) or network drive location.
CHN628
461
Retrieve Backup
Data can be retrieved using either method described below. The
instrument software must be closed to perform either procedure.
If there is a problem with the original database and the backup is to
replace it, copy the backup database folder from where it was stored
and use Windows Explorer to paste the folder into the original folder
location for the database. Be aware that data generated in the original
database between the time the back up was made and the time the
backed up data is restored will be lost.
OR
To access the backup as a separate database, copy the backup
database to the desired location. If prompted, do not overwrite an
existing database in this case. Use the Database Management wizard
to add a database connection to this database. Refer to Adding a
Connection to an Existing Database, page 463.
If restoring from read-only media, after copying the database to its
new location, use Windows Explorer to change the attributes for all
folders and files so that they are not read only. To do this, right-click
on the folder name, select Properties, and then clear the Read Only
check box.
Selecting a Database Connection
462
1.
2.

3.
Under Connections, click on the desired database connection.
4.
Click Select.
5.
Click Finish to open the selected database.
CHN628
System Setup
Adding a Database Connection

The following section explains how to connect to an existing database
or a new database.
Refer to Adding a Connection to an Existing Database, page 463.
Refer to Adding a Connection to a New Database, page 464.
Adding a Connection to an Existing Database
Connecting to an existing database allows you to use an existing file
system database, which could be very important in a situation that
required a software reinstall such as a system crash. This type of
connection provides the means to reconnect to an existing database.
1.
2.

Management.
3.
In the Start Dialog Box,
4.
System Setup
A.
Select Add.
B.
Click Next.
C.
Select File System Database - Use Existing.
D.
Click Next.
When the Connect File System Database dialog box appears,

enter the information for the desired database as follows:
A.
For Connection Name, enter a name for database connection

that will also appear in the Start dialog box in the
Connections list.
B.
For Directory Name,

1)
Select Browse.
2)
Navigate to the folder for the database and click on it as

shown in the following screen shot. Do not click on the
Data folder itself. The names assigned to the databases
in the directory on your system may not match the
folder names in the screen shot.
3)
Click OK.
CHN628
463
5.
If desired, select the Read Only check box. When selected, the
database information can be viewed but not changed. When the
check box is cleared, the database can be modified.
6.
Clear the Log Activity check box.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Click Finish.
Adding a Connection to a New Database

New databases will be file system databases. This database type uses
files and folders as its storage media. The size of the database is only
limited to the free space on the hard drive.
To prevent the database from running slow, it is recommended that
virus checking of the database directory be disabled. It is also
recommended to use NTFS as the hard drive file format.
1.
2.

Management.
3.
4.
464
A.
Select Add.
B.
Click Next.
C.
Select File System Database - Create New.
D.
Click Next.
Complete the Create File System Database dialog box as follows:
CHN628
System Setup
A.

Connections list.
B.
To use the default location and name for the database

folder, proceed to step C. To use another location,
C.
1)
Create a folder in the desired location using Windows

Explorer.
2)
Select the Advanced check box, and the Directory Name

selection box will appear.
3)
For Directory Name, click Browse.
4)

shown in the following screen shot. There will not be a
data folder since it is a new database. The names
assigned to the databases in the directory on your
system may not match the folder names in the screen
shot.
5)
Click OK.
Clear the Log Activity check box.
5.
Click Next and the Start dialog box will appear.
6.
The Select check box is automatically selected. Click Finish to

access the newly created database.
Deleting a Database Connection

Delete does not remove physical files from the hard drive. Use
Windows Explorer to remove the physical files.
System Setup
1.
2.

Management.
3.
Under Connections, click on database connection to remove.
4.
Click Delete.
CHN628
465
5.
Click Next. The Delete dialog box will appear.
6.
Click Next to remove the database.
Validating a Database
During database validation, the database files will be reviewed for
corruption. If orphan objects are found, refer to Reviewing Orphan
Objects, page 468.
To validate a database,
466
1.
2.

3.
Under Connections, click on a database to validate, click Select,

and then click the Validate check box.
CHN628
System Setup
4.
System Setup
Click Finish. The Database Validation dialog box will display the
status of the database validation.
CHN628
467
Reviewing Orphan Objects

When orphaned objects or corrupt database objects are discovered, a
dialog box such as the one shown below will display. It is
recommended to select No and review orphaned objects (such as
samples, methods, and standards) as they display in the Orphaned
Database Object dialog box to ensure they are valid.
If the database is being validated because database objects are
missing, for example samples have disappeared from the spreadsheet,
then recover the orphans by selecting No or No All. Select No to be
prompted for each orphan or select No All to recover all orphans
without being prompted for each one.
If all samples are displayed in the spreadsheet and there are no
apparent problems with the database, then the orphans are likely
objects that weren't completely removed from the database when they
were deleted and these orphans can be deleted. Select Yes to be
prompted before deleting each orphan or select Yes All to delete all
orphans without being prompted for each one.
468
CHN628
System Setup
Compacting/Repairing a Legacy Database

Compact/Repair is available on databases that are not file system
databases. For file system databases, the compact/repair selection
will not appear on the Start dialog box.
1.
2.

Management.
3.
Under Connections, click on the database to compact/repair.
4.
Click Compact/Repair.
5.
Click Next and the following message will display.
6.
Click Next to compact/repair the database.
Managing Databases for 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance

The following section provides further information about how to create
and view log archive databases for 21 CFR Part 11 compliance. For
general database topics such as Using the Start Dialog Box or Deleting
a Database Connection, refer to Managing Databases, page 459.
In the software, logging can be enabled to keep a record of all changes
as they are made to the database. Logging provides a history of the
changes made as well as the current database values.
By default, logging is not enabled. Logging can be enabled or disabled
when a database connection is added. Refer to Enabling Logging for an
Existing Database Connection, and Enabling Logging for a New
Database, page 471.
Enabling Logging for an Existing Database
Connecting to an existing database allows you to use an existing file
system database, which could be very important in a situation that
required a software reinstall such as a system crash. This type of
connection provides the means to reconnect to an existing database.
System Setup
1.
2.

Management.
CHN628
469
3.
4.
470

A.
Select Add.
B.
Click Next.
C.
Select File System Database - Use Existing.
D.
Click Next.
When the Connect File System Database dialog box appears,

enter the information for the desired database as follows:
A.

Connections list.
B.
For Directory Name,

1)
Select Browse.
2)

shown in the following screen shot. Do not click on the
Data folder itself. The names assigned to the databases
in the directory on your system may not match the
folder names in the screen shot.
3)
Click OK.
CHN628
System Setup
5.
If desired, select the Read Only check box. When selected, the
database information can be viewed but not changed. When the
check box is cleared, the database can be modified.
6.
Select the Log Activity check box to turn on logging for any future
changes made to the database through the instrument software.
7.
Click Next.
8.
Click Finish.
Enabling Logging for a New Database

New databases will be file system databases. This database type uses
files and folders as its storage media. The size of the database is only
limited to the free space on the hard drive.
To prevent the database from running slow, it is recommended that
virus checking of the database directory be disabled. It is also
recommended to use NTFS as the hard drive file format.
1.
2.

Management.
3.
4.
System Setup
A.
Select Add.
B.
Click Next.
C.
Select File System Database - Create New.
D.
Click Next.
Complete the Create File System Database dialog box as follows:
A.

Connections list.
B.
To use the default location and name for the database

folder, proceed to step C. To use another location,
1)
Create a folder in the desired location using Windows

Explorer.
2)
Select the Advanced check box, and the Directory Name

selection box will appear.
3)
For Directory Name, click Browse.
CHN628
471
C.
4)

shown in the following screen shot. There will not be a
data folder since it is a new database. The names
assigned to the databases in the directory on your
system may not match the folder names in the screen
shot.
5)
Click OK.
Select the Log Activity check box to turn on logging for

changes made to the database through the instrument
software.
5.
Click Next and the Start dialog box will appear.
6.
The Select check box is automatically selected. Click Finish to

access the newly created database.
Database Menu
Items on the Database menu in the instrument software will only
appear if logging was enabled when the database connection was
created. Refer to Enabling Logging for an Existing Database,
page 469.
472
CHN628
System Setup
Presentation Time
When logging is enabled for a database connection, the presentation
time can used to view the database as it existed at some previous
point in time. For example, it could be used to view results before a
change in calibration was performed. While a presentation time is set,
and the Live check box is not selected, changes are not allowed to the
database. For example, samples cannot be added and changes cannot
be made to methods.
1.
Click the Database menu in the instrument software and select

Presentation Time. The Presentation Time dialog box will appear.
2.
Select the time and date for the presentation time as follows:
Select the Live check box to view current information or clear the
Live checkbox in order to select a different date and time.
When the Live check box is cleared, Date and Time are active.
System Setup
CHN628
473
A.
For Date, click the arrow to display a calendar.
B.
From the calendar, select a date. If desired, select the time

and then select either Local or UT (Universal Time). Local
displays the local time zone. UT displays the universal time
that corresponds with the UTC (Universal Coordinated Time)
as defined by the National Bureau of Standards.
C.
Click OK. The results as they were at the selected date and
time will appear in the spreadsheet.
View History
When logging is enabled for a database connection, View History
displays a log of database changes that could be used to identify the
time/date when some particular change took place. It can only be used
to identify who made a change because there is no description of what
each change represents.
1.
Click the Database menu in the instrument software and select

View History. The View Log dialog box will appear.
2.
The log items that appear in the View Log dialog box are
explained below.
Date/Time displays the date and time that the database change
occurred.
Entry ID displays a unique identifying number for the database
object that was changed. For example, each sample would have a
unique number.
Action displays Created, Modified or Deleted to indicate the type
of action that occurred.
User displays the username of the person who performed the
action.
3.
474
Select the time zone to use for displaying Date/Time. Local

displays the local time zone. UT displays the universal time that
corresponds with the UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) as
defined by the National Bureau of Standards.
CHN628
System Setup
Archive Log
When logging is enabled for a database connection, an Archive Log
database can be created to copy log entries to another file and
possibly reduce the amount of data stored in the database.
1.
From the Database Menu in the instrument software, select

Archive Log. The Archive File dialog box will appear.
2.
In the Archive File dialog box,
3.
System Setup
A.
Select the Delete Entries upon Completion check box to

delete entries from the database after they are copied to the
output file. Clear the check box and entries will not be
deleted from the database. Selecting this check box reduces
the amount of data stored in database files. The file size may
not change as a result of this, but space will be made
available inside the file for more data to be stored. As a
precaution, LECO recommends performing a regular
database backup right before using Delete Entries upon
Completion. Refer to Creating and Retrieving Database
Backups, page 461.
B.
For the Stop Date, click the arrow and select a date. Any log
entries generated on or before this date will be placed into
the output file.
C.
Enter a filename for the log archive database.
D.
Select the location for the log archive database.
E.
Click Save.
After a log archive database is created, you can create a database

connection to the archive log file and view the information in a
read-only fashion, which means you can view the log archive
database but cannot operate the instrument or analyze samples.
Refer to Adding a Connection to a Log Archive Database.
CHN628
475
Adding a Connection to a Log Archive Database

1.
2.

3.
4.
A.
Select Add.
B.
Click Next.
C.
Select Database Log Archive.
D.
Click Next.
Complete the Connect Log Archive dialog box as follows:

A.
For Connection Name, enter a name for database log archive

connection that will also appear in the Start dialog box in the
Connections list.
B.
For File Name, Click Browse and navigate to the log archive
file. The log archive file should have a .GLA file extension.
5.
Click Next. The Start dialog box will appear.
6.
Click Select and then click Finish.
Removing Results from a Database

When logging is enabled for a database connection, the amount of
data stored in the database can become significantly large, and it may
become necessary to remove results from the database. Deleting
results in the instrument software will only increase the size of the
database because the database keeps track of all changes when
logging is enabled. The following procedure explains how to remove
results from the database for file system databases or for other
databases.
For File System Databases
To remove results from a file system database, it is only necessary to
create an archive log as explained below.
1.
Create an archive log by following the steps in Archive Log, page

475.
2.
For Legacy Databases

For databases that are not file system databases, use the following
steps to compact/repair the database and recover the freed up space.
476
1.
Create an archive log that has the Delete Entries Upon

Completion check box selected by following the steps in Archive
Log, page 475.
2.
3.

CHN628
System Setup
4.
Select the database connection for the database, not the archive
log, click Compact/Repair, and then click Next. The following
message will display.
5.
Click Next to compact/repair the database.
Disabling Logging on an Existing Database

Use the following instructions to disable logging on a database in which
logging is enabled.
1.
2.

Management.
3.
In the Database Start dialog box, select the existing database

connection in which you prefer to disable logging. Remember the
name of the database and the base file location because you will
need this information in order to reconnect to the database in
step 8.A, page 477.
4.
Select Delete, and follow the instructions provided by the

software. Refer to Deleting a Database Connection, page 465,
for further information. The Delete operation will not delete the
actual database; it will only remove the database connection
name from the list.
5.
Return to the Database Start dialog box.
6.
In the Start dialog box, select Add, and then select Next.
7.
Under Database Types, highlight File System Database-Use

Existing, and click Next.
8.
Complete the Connect Database dialog box as follows:
9.
A.
For the Connection Name, enter the same name as the

database that was just deleted.
B.
Enter the Path to the database files.
Verify that the checkbox next to Log Activity is blank and click
Next.
10. Click Next and the Start dialog box will appear.
11. The Select check box is automatically selected.
12. Click Finish.
System Setup
CHN628
477
Deleting Analyzed Samples

The size of the database can be reduced by deleting analyzed samples.
This procedure permits the operator to delete analyzed samples by
prior date. Analyzed samples can be exported and then deleted by
checking a check box.
478
1.
Click Database and select Delete by Date.
2.
Click the drop-down arrow and enter the prior sample deletion
date.
3.
If the prior samples to be deleted should be exported and saved

before theyre deleted, check the Transfer Export Samples to be
deleted check box.
4.
Click Delete to delete the prior analyzed samples or Cancel to

cancel deletion.
CHN628
System Setup
Operation
The Operation chapter explains how to prepare the sample for an
analysis once the instrument is setup. First Time Analysis contains
step-by-step procedures that explain how to create a method, login
samples, and perform an analysis.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 54
First Time Analysis ........................................................................ 55
Shutdown Procedure .................................................................... 512
Sample Preparation ..................................................................... 513
Gel Capsule Method ................................................................ 513
Tin Foil Method ...................................................................... 514
Using the Quick Sampler .................................................... 514
Manual Preparation............................................................ 515
Using the Foiler ................................................................. 516
Login ......................................................................................... 517
Blank Login ........................................................................... 517
Sample Login ......................................................................... 518
Sample Login Definitions .................................................... 519
Correct for Moisture ..................................................................... 520
Correct for Atmospheric Blank ...................................................... 521
Enter a Mass from the Balance ...................................................... 522
From the Sample Login Screen ................................................ 522
Directly into the Spreadsheet ................................................... 522
Analyze a Sample ........................................................................ 523
Analyze a Blank ..................................................................... 523
Analyze a Standard ................................................................ 523
Analyze a Sample ................................................................... 524
Abort an Analysis .............................................................. 524
Analyze Multiple Samples ................................................... 524
Delay Analysis .................................................................. 527
Pause Analysis .................................................................. 528
Cancel Pause .................................................................... 529
Calibration ....................................................................... 530
Blank Calibration ............................................................... 530
Standard Calibration .......................................................... 530
Standard Samples ............................................................. 530
Operation
CHN628
51
Drift Correction ................................................................. 530

Replace Drift Standard ....................................................... 530
Blank Calibration .................................................................... 531
Standard Calibration ............................................................... 532
New Standard Calibration ................................................... 532
Add Standards .................................................................. 533
View Calibration ................................................................ 533
Edit Calibration ................................................................. 534
Standard Calibration Definitions ..................................... 534
Drift Correction ...................................................................... 534
View History ..................................................................... 536
Replace Drift Standard ....................................................... 537
Samples ..................................................................................... 539
Sample Editing Functions ........................................................ 539
Insert a Sample ................................................................ 539
Fill Cells with the Same ...................................................... 539
Delete a Sample..................................................................... 540
Recalculate Results................................................................. 540
Display Protein Results ........................................................... 541
Typical Protein Factors ....................................................... 542
View History .......................................................................... 542
View History Definitions ..................................................... 543
Sample Signature ................................................................... 543
View Signatures ................................................................ 544
Printing Reports .......................................................................... 545
Configuring Report before Printing ............................................ 545
Printing from the Software ...................................................... 547
Text Export Data ......................................................................... 549
Export Configuration ............................................................... 549
Filename .......................................................................... 549
Export Definitions ......................................................... 550
Fields............................................................................... 551
Delimiters ........................................................................ 552
Automation ...................................................................... 553
Advanced ......................................................................... 554
Preview ............................................................................ 555
Export Text Data .................................................................... 556
Export Text Buffers ................................................................ 558
Text Import Data ........................................................................ 559
Transmit Data ............................................................................. 560
Transmit Format Configuration................................................. 560
Fields............................................................................... 561
52
CHN628
Operation
Delimiters ........................................................................ 562

Automation ...................................................................... 563
Communication Settings .................................................... 564
Serial Port Definitions ................................................... 565
Advanced ......................................................................... 566
Preview ............................................................................ 567
Transmit Selected Samples .......................................................... 568
Data Backup ............................................................................... 569
Transfer Export ...................................................................... 569
Transfer Import .......................................................................... 571
Error Messages ........................................................................... 572
Error Message Definitions ........................................................ 572
Operation
CHN628
53
Illustrations
Figure 5-1 Sample PreparationGel Capsule Method ..........................513
Figure 5-2 Sample PreparationQuick Sampler Method ......................514
Figure 5-3 Sample PreparationManual Method .................................515
Figure 5-4 Sample PreparationFoiler Method ...................................516
54
CHN628
Operation
First Time Analysis

The first time the instrument is operated, and any time the software
is updated, these steps must be performed in the order in which they
appear.
1.
2.
Operation
Perform a System check before operation to determine if the

instrument is operating properly.
A.
Let the instrument warm up and stabilize.
B.
From the Diagnostics menu, click System Check.
C.
Check the results of all systems. The circle in front of the

system name should be filled in green and in the results
column all systems should indicate Passed.
Perform a Leak Check, page 816, on both the oxygen and

helium systems.
CHN628
55
3.
Create a method. Refer to Method Configuration, page 436, for

A.
From the Configuration menu, click Method. The Method

B.
Click Properties. The Method Properties dialog box will

appear.
Unless otherwise directed by the LECO Application lab, verify the

method parameters have been set to their default values for the first
time analysis.
C.
56
Click OK to close the Method Properties dialog box.
CHN628
Operation
4.
Login a blank. Refer to Blank Login, page 517, for additional

information.
A.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample Login

B.
Enter the information required in the dialog box. Refer to

Blank Login Definitions, page 517.
Enter Blank for sample name, 1.000 for sample mass.
Analyze blanks until a plateau is reached (typically
0.001%). Analyze three to five additional blanks and set
blank area using these values.
Operation
C.
Click OK to login the blank.
D.
Enter a number one (1) in the Location column on the main

spreadsheet. If the Location column is not visible, refer to
Sample Display Configuration on page 420.
CHN628
57
5.
Analyze a blank. Refer to Analyze a Blank, page 523, for

From the Samples menu, click Analyze. Analysis will
automatically start with the first blank.
58
6.
The blank results will probably start higher, drop slowly, and then
stabilize. Highlight the last few blanks analyzed to check the
precision. Highlight the entire row for samples selected and view
statistics. Statistics should appear in the lower right corner of the
screen. The SD of the blank should be 0.0010% at 1.0 g. If the
SD precision is acceptable, keep the same blanks highlighted and
proceed to the next step.
7.
Perform blank calibration. Refer to Blank Calibration, page 531,

A.
In the spreadsheet, select the analyzed blanks to set the

initial blank calibration value area. These should be the same
blanks used in the previous step.
B.
From the Configuration menu, click Blank. The Blank dialog

box will appear with a new blank calibration value. Blank is
the raw area of analyze that is subtracted from the raw area
every analysis.
C.
Click OK to enter the new blank calibration value.
CHN628
Operation
8.
Login a standard. Refer to Sample Login, page 518, for

A.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample Login

B.

Sample Login Definitions, page 519, for additional
information.
1)
Enter the sample name of the standard.
2)
Enter the protein factor when answers are desired as

protein (% protein format).
When entering additional standards, it is only necessary to enter the

mass. All other analysis parameter values will be automatically
entered from the first sample.
C.
9.
Analyze a standard. Refer to Analyze a Standard, page 523, for

A.
Operation
Click OK to login the standard.
From the Samples menu, click Analyze. Analysis will

automatically start with the first standard.
CHN628
59
10. The answers may not appear accurate although they should be
precise. Once standards have been run, select them and view the
statistics. For multiple standards of the same weight (i.e. 0.20xx,
0.20xx, 0.20xx, etc), the RSD should be <0.35% RSD or within
the certified tolerance of the reference material (which ever is
greater).
AccuracyThe amount of measurement deviation from a
known accurate comparable source such as a standard
calibration sample.
If repeated measurements are accurate, the instrument is
precise. If repeated measurements are precise, the instrument
is not necessarily accurate; calibration makes the instrument
accurate.
PrecisionThe amount of measurement deviation from one
measurement to another without regard to the accuracy or
specific value of the measurement. It is the degree of
refinement with which an operation is performed or a
measurement stated.
11. Although the standards may not be correct, as long as they are
close in numbers, the instrument has the precision it needs to
continue. Once the instrument is calibrated, it should be both
precise and accurate.
12. Perform Calibration. Refer to Calibration, page 530, for
A.
In the spreadsheet, select the Analyzed Standard Samples

for Calibration.
These should be the same standard samples used in the
previous steps. If using single standard for calibration,
weigh, login, and run Standards of the following weights: (3)
500 mg Standards, (3) 250 mg Standards, (3) 200 mg
Standards, (3) 150 mg Standards, (3) 100 mg Standards,
(4) 75 mg Standards, (4) 35 mg Standards. Once they have
been run, highlight as in the previous steps and look at the
statistics. For standards of varying weights (0.30xx, 0.25xx,
0.10xx, 0.00xx) RSD should be <0.50% RSD or within the
certified tolerance of the reference material (which ever is
greater). You can omit 1 or 2 answers that are not a good fit
with the others in their respective weight groups.
For calibrations that cover wide dynamic ranges, consult the
LECO Applications Laboratory for support.
510
CHN628
Operation
B.
From the Configuration menu, click Calibrations. The

Calibrations dialog box will appear.
For a calibration at one weight, the curve type selected must
be Single Standard Calibration.
For a calibration at multiple weights with the same standard,
use Linear, Quadratic or Cubic.
Refer to step 6 (Perform blank calibration) for additional
information.
C.
View the calibration curve. Verify the calibration curve goes

through, or comes close to every calibration point. If not,
click the Curve drop down box and select another curve
type. Refer to Standard Calibration, page 532, for
D.
Click OK to set the new calibration. The Save Calibration

E.
Click OK to enter the new calibration. The new calibration

equation and the previous calibration equation will be
displayed.
F.
Click Close.
13. Calibration is complete. Analyze varying weights of the calibration

sample to check the calibration.
Operation
CHN628
511
Shutdown Procedure
Use this procedure to safely power down and turn off the instrument.
If Cancel is clicked during this procedure shutdown will be aborted and
the furnace temperatures restored to their original settings.
During shutdown the gas is turned off.
INSTRUMENT DAMAGE
Failure to cool the furnaces prior to turning the power
switch OFF will result in overheating of the loading head
assembly and possible damage to the furnace.
512
1.
Click Maintenance and select Instrument Shutdown. The

Instrument Shutdown screen will appear.
2.
Wait until the combustion temperature and afterburner

temperature drop below 600oC and the red indicators turn green.
3.
Click Close CHN628 Software to exit the instrument application

software.
4.
Turn the AC power switch OFF.
CHN628
Operation
Sample Preparation
Each sample holder type will require its own blank value and should be
used in the main calibration.
Samples should be homogenized prior to encapsulation.
Sample presses may be used to maximize sample size.
Gel Capsule Method

Gel Capsules should only be used for nitrogen only analysis. Sample
size is dependent upon the sample type, desired precision and
optimum performance. Contact the LECO applications laboratory for
further information.
1.
Place the Sample Cup Holder on the balance.
2.
Place the Gel Cap (small or medium) into the sample cup holder
and tare the balance.
3.
Remove the Capsule from the sample cup holder and add sample
to capsule.
4.
Place Capsule in the sample cup holder and weigh.
5.
Record the mass in the spreadsheet or automatically through

print function on the balance.
502-338 Small Capsule/400 p/pk
502-382 Medium Capsule/400 p/pk
604-373 Small Sample Cup Holder

604-398 Medium Sample Cup Holder
Figure 5-1
Sample PreparationGel Capsule Method
For analysis of multiple samples, install and use the 619-180 Carousel
Assembly then load the samples in the proper order for analysis.
Operation
CHN628
513
Tin Foil Method

Using the Quick Sampler
1.
Place the small or large foil on the balance and tare.
2.
Place the Foil Holder on a work surface and center the small or
large foil on the holder.
3.
Pull the Quick Sampler Plunger up by the handle end to make

room for the sample in the bottom of the tube and press the tube
into sample material. Verify the sample is firmly packed.
4.
Place the end of the tube in the center of the foil and work the
tube into the foil by pushing gently and rocking the tube back and
forth.
5.
Firmly holding the tube in place, push the plunger down. When
the sample is in the foil, remove the sampler.
6.
Crimp the foil closed with tweezers.
7.
Holding the sample in place with the tweezers, lift the sample up
off the holder.
8.
Enter the mass in the spreadsheet or automatically by pressing

print on the balance.
604-494
PLUNGER
502-210
TUBE
(500/PK)
502-186
SMALL TIN FOIL CUP
(100/PK)
502-397
LARGE TIN FOIL CUP
(100/PK)
603-493
FOIL HOLDER
Figure 5-2
Sample PreparationQuick Sampler Method
514
CHN628
Operation
Manual Preparation
1.
Place the Sample Cup Holder on the balance.
2.
Place foil into the Sample Cup Holder and tare the balance.
3.
Remove the foil and the sample cup holder from balance and add
sample to foil.
4.
Place the sample cup holder and foil on balance and weigh.
5.
Remove the foil from the sample cup holder and twist to seal.
6.
Enter the mass in the spreadsheet or automatically by pressing

print on the balance.
Sample size is dependent upon sample type, desired precision and

optimal performance.
502-186
Small Tin Foil Cup
(100/pk)
502-397
Medium Tin Foil Cup
(100/pk)
Add
Sample
Twist
Foil
604-398
Sample Cup Holder
Figure 5-3
Sample PreparationManual Method
Operation
CHN628
515
Using the Foiler

Use only small tin foil cups with the foiler.
1.
Place the Foil Capsule on the balance and tare the balance.
2.
Place the Small Tin Foil Capsule in the foil holder.
3.
Place the Funnel on the foil holder.
4.
Add Sample.
5.
Insert and press down the plunger to pack the sample.
6.
Holding the plunger in place, lift the funnel up against the

plunger, and then remove both pieces.
7.
Crimp the Foil closed with tweezers.
8.
Remove and weigh the sample.
601-492
PLUNGER
601-491
FUNNEL
502-186
FOIL CUP
(100/pk)
601-495
FOIL
HOLDER
601-489
BASE
601-490
FOILER
Figure 5-4
Sample PreparationFoiler Method
516
CHN628
Operation
Login
Blank Login
Before a blank is analyzed, a sample named Blank must be entered
into the spreadsheet. This procedure is called Blank Login.
An analysis method should be developed before a sample is logged in.
Refer to Method Configuration on page 436.
Operation
1.
Click Samples and select Login. The Sample Login dialog box will
appear.
2.
Click the drop down arrow, in the sample name selection box, and
select Blank from the list.
3.
Type the number of blanks repetitions you require.
4.
Enter the information required in the Login Screen. Refer to the

Glossary, page 121, for Blank Login definitions.
5.
Click OK to login the blank.
CHN628
517
Sample Login
Before a sample is analyzed it must be entered into the spreadsheet.
This procedure is called Sample Login. A sample that has been logged
in may be named in various alphanumeric notations.
Refer to Method Configurationon page 436.
Prepare the sample for analysis. Refer to Sample Preparation,
518
1.
box will appear.
2.
Enter the Sample Name in the sample name selection box.
3.
Enter the information required in the Login Screen. Refer to

Sample Login Definitions, page 519, for additional information.
4.
Click OK to login the sample.
CHN628
Operation
Sample Login Definitions

Sample NameThe name or type of sample.
MassThe mass of the sample. Click Balance to enter a mass from an
external balance.
LocationThe position in the autoloader where the sample is located.
MethodThe method used for analysis. Click the down arrow to select
from the list of methods.
CommentsA statement used to explain an operation or procedure.
This is an optional entry.
DescriptionA statement used to explain or identify a sample. This is
an optional entry.
OperatorThe name of the operator. This is an optional entry.
Moisture BasisThe amount of moisture in the final product. A
percentage should be entered. This is an optional entry.
Sample MoistureThe amount of moisture in the sample used to
compensate the final result. A percentage should be entered. This is an
optional entry.
Atmospheric BlankAtmospheric Blank compensates the calculation of
the final result for the nitrogen content that may be trapped within the
sample. A percentage should be entered. This is an optional entry.
Protein FactorThe value used to calculate a protein result based on a
nitrogen analysis. This is an optional entry.
Add to End of ListCheck to enter the logged in sample in the last row
of the spreadsheet.
Add as Next Sample to RunClick to enter the logged in sample after
the last sample that was analyzed.
Keep Logging Samples until Cancel is PressedCheck this box to log
consecutive sample. The dialog box will reappear after OK is clicked.
Operation
CHN628
519
Correct for Moisture

Moisture basis and sample moisture compensates the calculation of the
final result for moisture content. They should be entered during
sample login.
Moisture BasisAnalysis assumes the sample is analyzed on a dry
basis. Moisture basis adds a moisture value during calculation of the
final result. When the sample is analyzed, its result is determined with
a specific amount of moisture that is not in the sample (on a moisture
basis).
Sample MoistureSample moisture is the amount of moisture
contained in a sample before analysis. The moisture value is
subtracted during calculation of the final result. The sample is analyzed
"on a dry basis".
520
1.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample dialog box will
appear.
2.
Click the Sample Moisture edit box and enter a value.
3.
Click the Moisture Basis edit box and enter a value.
4.
Click OK.
CHN628
Operation
Correct for Atmospheric Blank

Analysis of powdered samples on the instrument may require sealing
the tin foil sample cup before introducing the sample into the
instrument. Powdered samples trap atmosphere, which includes
nitrogen within the sample. When the tin foil sample cup is sealed
atmospheric gas is trapped within the sample. Typically, for a sample
mass of 0.25g, approximately 0.04% nitrogen is trapped within the
sample. Utilization of the Atmospheric Blank compensates the
calculation of the final result for this nitrogen content. The amount of
Atmospheric blank should be entered during sample login.
1.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample Login Dialog
box will appear.
2.
Click the Atmospheric Blank edit box and enter a value.
3.
Click OK.
If the atmospheric blank was not entered in login, it can still be

corrected by entering the value in the spreadsheet during or after
analysis and pressing the enter key.
Operation
CHN628
521
Enter a Mass from the Balance

An external balance must be interfaced with the instrument to enter a
mass automatically.
The application must be controlling the balance before a mass can be
automatically entered. Refer to Balance Installation on page 33 for
more information.
From the Sample Login Screen

Click Balance to enter a weight from an external balance.
Directly into the Spreadsheet

A sample will be added to the first row of the spreadsheet without a
value entered for the mass.
522
1.
Place the crucible on the balance.
2.
Press Tare.
3.
Place the sample in the crucible.
4.
Press Print on the balance or click the Samples menu and select
Balance. The sample mass will be entered into the first row of the
spreadsheet without a mass entry.
CHN628
Operation
Analyze a Sample
A blank is an analysis that is run without either sample or standard
material being burned. Nothing can be in the furnace, capsule or tin
sample cup. Anything that would be used with the sample, except the
sample, can be dropped into the furnace during blank analysis. The
area of the blank is subtracted from the sample or standard analysis.
Analyze a Blank
Analyze a Blank permits the operator to run an analysis without
burning a sample. This is done in order to obtain data to set the blank
area. Refer to Blank Calibration, page 531, for additional information.
Before proceeding, Blank Login, page 517, must be completed.
1.
Click Analyze (F5) analysis will automatically start with the first
blank.
2.
Blank results will be shown in the spreadsheet and plot window.
3.
Accept a blank value for all elements in the calibration.
Analyze a Standard
Analyze a Standard is used to analyze standard samples for
calibration.
Before proceeding, Define a Calibration Standard, page 447, and
Login using a Calibration Standard, page 448, must be completed.
For some applications it may be necessary to use a standard with the
same density and/or concentration of sulfur. Consult the LECO
Applications Laboratory for further assistance.
LECO recommends using certified reference materials for all
calibrations.
Operation
1.
From the Samples menu, click Analyze, press F5 or click the F5

analyze button. The next unanalyzed sample will start.
2.
After analysis, the sample plot will appear in the window below
the spreadsheet. The standard analysis result will appear in the
spreadsheet under the element name.
CHN628
523
Analyze a Sample
Sample analysis determines the element concentration in a sample.
Before proceeding, Blank Calibration, page 531, Standard
Calibration, page 532, and Sample Login, page 518, must be
completed.
1.
From the Samples menu, click Analyze, press F5 or click the F5

analyze button. The next unanalyzed sample will start.
2.
After analysis, the sample plot will appear in the window below
the spreadsheet. The analysis result will appear in the
spreadsheet under the element name.
Abort an Analysis
An analysis in progress can be aborted. If the analysis is aborted,
"Abort" will appear under analysis date.
Before proceeding, Analyze a Sample, page 523, must be
completed.
From the Samples menu, click Abort. The analysis in progress will be
aborted.
Analyze Multiple Samples
This procedure programs the instrument to analyze a group of samples
without the aid of an operator during analysis.
Before proceeding, Method Configuration, page 436, Blank
Calibration, page 531, and Standard Calibration, page 532, must
be completed.
Prepare the samples for analysis. Refer to Sample Preparation, page
CHN628Install and use the 619-180 Carousel Assembly then load
the samples in the proper order for analysis.
524
CHN628
Operation
Operation
1.

Configuration dialog box will appear.
2.
Click Auto Increment Sample Name to advance the sample name

by 1. The last character in the sample names must be a number.
3.
Click the Carousels drop down box and select the number of
Carousels used for multiple sample analysis. The maximum
number that can be selected is 4.
4.
Click OK to close the System Configuration dialog box.
CHN628
525
5.
From the Samples menu, click Login. The Sample dialog box will
appear.
6.
Login a sample to analyze.
7.
Click the check box at the bottom of the window to keep logging
in samples.
8.
Repeat step 6 until all samples are logged in.
9.
Click Cancel to close the Sample Login dialog box.
10. View the location number of the first sample in the spreadsheet
and compare it to the location of the first sample in the carousel.
If the location numbers are not the same, click the Location Box
of the first sample and enter the carousel location number of the
first sample to analyze. The location numbers in the spreadsheet,
following the first sample, will change consecutively.
11. From the Samples menu, click Analyze to start the analysis.
526
CHN628
Operation
Delay Analysis
Delayed Analysis permits the operator to start an analysis at a later
date and time.
Refer to Method Configuration on page 436.
Operation
1.
Determine where in the sample list to pause or delay analysis and

select the sample. The sample must be an analyzed sample.
2.
From the Samples menu click Pause or press F7. The Pause/Delay
Start dialog box will appear.
3.
In the highlighted field, enter the date and time to start the
delayed analysis. The date and time that appears may be edited.
The format for entering the date and time is [05/01/2000
4:30:00 PM]. A space should be inserted after the date and time
or select Manually if pausing for operator intervention.
4.
Click OK to start the delayed analysis. A clock symbol will appear

in the spreadsheet next to the sample that will be analyzed at the
programmed delayed start time or if Manually was selected a red
octagon will appear in the spreadsheet. The analysis will begin
only when the operator clicks analyze.
CHN628
527
Pause Analysis
Pause Analysis permits the operator to pause analysis at a selected
sample and then resume at a programmed date and time. When the
programmed time is reached, analysis will continue.
Before proceeding, Analyze Multiple Samples, page 524, must be
completed.
528
1.
Determine where in the sample list to pause or delay analysis and

select the sample. The sample must be an analyzed sample.
2.
From the Samples menu, click Pause. The Pause/Delay Start

3.
In the highlighted field, enter the date and time to restart

analysis. The date and time that appears may be edited. The
format for entering the date and time is [06/01/2000 4:30:00
PM]. A space should be inserted after the date and time.
4.
Click OK to program the pause. A clock symbol will appear in the

spreadsheet next to the sample that will be analyzed after the
pause.
CHN628
Operation
Cancel Pause
Cancel Pause permits the operator to remove a programmed delay
analysis, pause analysis, or hold analysis from the spreadsheet.
Before proceeding, Analyze Multiple Samples, page 524, must be
completed.
Operation
1.
Click and select the row where the delay analysis, pause analysis,
or hold analysis is programmed.
2.
From the Samples menu, click Pause. The Pause/Delay Start

3.
Click Clear. The programmed type, delay or pause will be

removed.
CHN628
529
Calibration
Calibration is the process that adjusts the instrument to produce the
correct result when a calibration standard is analyzed. A calibration
standard has a known or certified value.. First a Blank Calibration is
performed, then Standard Calibration and then as daily maintenance
both a Blank Calibration and Drift Correction.
Blank Calibration
Blank Calibration is used to calculate the blank or baseline. Sometimes
this is called the blank area. Blank calibration calculates the
instrument blank and adjusts the area of the analysis accordingly. The
system blank should be determined every day by performing a blank
calibration before analysis. A blank should be analyzed and the blank
calibration set prior to standard calibration or drift correction. Refer to
Blank Calibration on page 531.
Standard Calibration
Standard Calibration is used to calibrate the instrument with known
calibration standards. A single point calibration can be performed using
the curve type (single standard sample) (at a single mass) however;
LECO recommends multipoint calibrations that employ 1/certified
weighting. Additionally a blank calibration should be completed prior to
performing any calibration. Since Standard Calibration is saved with
each method, each method must be calibrated after it is created.
Standard Samples
During the calibration process only dried standards should be
employed. The analytical accuracy depends on the accuracy of the
standards. Drying the standards optimizes the accuracy. Standards
should be dried according to label instructions. Refer to Calibration on
page 532.
Drift Correction
Drift Correction is used to adjust the original calibration response to
match the current instrument response. Drift calibration should be
performed at the start of every day or when check standards fail to
return the proper values. This insures accurate calibration and analysis
results. Refer to Drift Correction on page 534. LECO recommends
that all check standards be independent of the drift standards. After
performing a drift correction, the result for the drift standard will be
the same result that the drift standard returned during the original
calibration (not the certified value).
Replace Drift Standard
Replace drift is used when a drift standard lot is changed. Replace drift
compensates for differences in the drift standard lot and produces a
more accurate drift calibration point. Refer to Replace Drift Standard
on page 537.
530
CHN628
Operation
Blank Calibration
Blank calibration calculates the instrument blank area and adjusts the
analysis area accordingly.
Analyze 3 to 5 blank conditioning samples before setting the blank
area.
Analyze 3 to 5 blank samples to set the blank area.
1.
Login and perform at least three blank analyses.
2.
Select the results of the blank analyses from the spreadsheet.
3.
Click Configuration and select Blank. The Element Selection

screen will appear.
In the following screen shot, the software displays the data in
blue to alert the operator that the data has changed.
Operation
4.
Include or exclude an element by clicking a row to select the

element and clicking Include/Exclude. The action box will indicate
if the element is included or excluded. If the element is included a
blank calculation will be calculated for that element.
5.
Click OK to calculate the system blank based on the analysis

results obtained in step one.
CHN628
531
Standard Calibration is a process that adjusts the response of the
instrument to that of known standards. The application software
permits two different types of calibration: Single Standard or
multipoint calibration. Since calibration is saved with each method,
each method must be calibrated after it is created.
Refer to Standard Calibration Definitions on page 534 when
performing this procedure.
The instrument Blank should be calibrated before performing standard
calibration. Refer to Blank Calibration on page 531.
LECO recommends multipoint calibrations that employs 1/certified
weighting be used for standard calibration.
Moisture is an optional entry for hydrogen and oxygen analysis.
Moisture must be determined before analysis and logged in as Sample
Moisture. Calibration will be compensated for moisture content. Refer
to Sample Login on page 518.
New Standard Calibration
532
1.
Login and perform at least three standard analyses.
2.
Select the results of the standard analyses from the spreadsheet.
3.
Click Configuration and select Calibrations.
4.
From the fly-out menu click New. The Calibration screen will
appear.
5.
Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select a Cell (detector)
to calculate a calibration for. A separate calibration can be
calculated for each cell.
CHN628
Operation
6.
Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select a Curve Type.
LECO recommends multipoint linear or higher order curves.
7.
View the curve displayed on the graph. It should intersect the

black squares which represents the standards. The curve fit can
also be evaluated by selecting a Relative Error plot on the
residual error plot.
8.
Click the arrow in the drop down box and Select the desired
Weighting. LECO recommends 1/certified weighting be used for a
standard calibration.
9.
Click OK to select the cell to calibrate. One or more cells can be

selected.
10. Click Print to print a copy of the calculated calibration on the

system printer.
11. Click OK to exit the calibration procedure and save the calibration
curve.
12. In the next dialog box highlight the cells that you wish to save
the calibration for and click OK. The calibration is saved and
associated with the method used to analyze the standards.
Add Standards
Add standards permits the operator to add analyzed standards to the
list of standards used for calibration.
1.
Select analyzed standard samples from the spreadsheet to be

added to the list of standards used for calibration.
2.
3.
From the fly-out menu click Add Standards.
4.
The highlighted Analyzed Standards will be added to the list of

samples used for calibration. To view the list of standard samples
click new from the calibrations fly-out menu.
View Calibration
Permits the operator to view the current calibration. The calibration
cannot be changed from this screen.
Operation
1.
2.
From the fly-out menu click View Calibration.
3.
The Calibration screen will appear. The screen will be the same as
new calibration except most of the selections will not be available.
CHN628
533
Edit Calibration
Permits the operator to view and edit the current calibration.
Standard Calibration Definitions

Cell TypeSelects the measurement cell that will be associated with
the calibration curve. In this case only sulfur can be selected.
Curve TypeSelects the type of calibration curve. Select a curve that
intersects each calibration result.
WeightingDetermines which calibration results, on the calibration
curve, get priority.
NormalEach point gets equal priority.
ManualA manual weighting can be entered.
1/CertifiedA weighting factor that can be applied to the

calibration data points. This will counteract a bias for higher
concentrations that develops naturally from the curve fitting
process.
ShowClick Show to show the last calibration. The last calibration will
appear on the graph in blue.
ManualClick Manual to enter a new calibration equation. This can be
done if a calibration was lost and a previous calibration recorded.
RMS Error (Root Mean Square)A method of quantifying the
dispersion or spread of data. It is used in the PC software to determine
which calibration curve is a better fit. The lower the RMS error the
better the fit.
Zoom InDraw a box around a calibration point to zoom in.
Zoom OutClick on a calibration point with the right mouse button. A
Zoom Out button will appear. Click the Zoom Out button to zoom out.
Drift Correction
Drift Correction is used to adjust the original calibration response to
match the current instrument response. Drift calibration should be
performed at the start of every day or when the check standard
doesnt return the correct result. This insures accurate calibration and
analysis results.
After calibration, a Standard in the center of the calibration range will
be automatically selected (with a tolerance of 12.5%) to be the drift
standard.
A different Drift Standard can be manually selected from the standard
calibration screen. Refer to Standard Calibration on page 532 for
more information.
A Blank Calibration should be performed before every Drift Correction.
Refer to Blank Calibration on page 531 for more information.
The Drift Standard should be homogenous and return precise results.
Check Standards should be independent of the drift standard.
534
CHN628
Operation
The Drift Standard and the Samples to be analyzed should be in the

center of the calibration curve.
1.
Click Samples and select Login Drift Sample.
2.
Click Drift Standards and select the Drift Standard to log in. The
drift standard must be within the specified mass range.
3.
Perform a Standard analysis.
4.
Select the result of the standard analysis from the spreadsheet.
5.
Click Configuration and select Drift. The fly out menu will appear.
6.
From the fly-out menu click Drift. The Calibration screen will
appear.
In the following screen shot, the software displays the data in
blue to alert the operator that the data has changed.
7.
Include or exclude an element by clicking a row to select the

drift calculation will be calculated for that element.
8.
Click OK to calculate the drift based on the analysis result

obtained in step one.
If more than one drift standard is selected the drift factor will be
the average of the selected standards.
After a drift correction the drift standard results will match the
result from the drift standard used in the original calibration
curve not the certified value.
Operation
CHN628
535
View History
View History plots past drift corrections on a graph. The operator or
lab manager can use this information to determine instrument
stability. After a pattern is determined the operator can watch for this.
If a sudden change in this pattern occurs it might indicate a potential
problem with the instrument.
536
1.
Click Configuration and select Drift. The fly out menu will appear.
2.
From the fly-out menu click View History. The View History screen
will appear.
3.
Click the Method drop-down arrow to select the method. Drift

calibration history for each method can be viewed.
4.
Click the Element drop-down arrow to select the detector. Drift

calibration history for each detector can be viewed.
5.
Click Details to view the last drift calibration values.
6.
Click OK to exit the screen.
CHN628
Operation
Replace Drift Standard

Replace Drift Standard is used when the operator switched to a new
standard calibration sample lot. Since there are differences in a
standard sample from one lot to another replace drift correction should
be used to compensate for these differences and produce a more
accurate calibration.
Operation
1.
Define a new standard for the new lot. Refer to Add Standards on
page 533.
2.
Perform an analysis with the new standard defined in step 1.
3.
Select the standard sample analysis result from step 2.
4.
Click Configuration and select Drift.
5.
Click Replace Drift from the fly-out menu.
6.
A dialog box will appear. Select the Drift standard to replace.
7.
Select the drift standard to replace then click OK. The new drift
Standard is selected as the drift standard
8.
Select the new drift standard just analyzed from the spreadsheet.
CHN628
537
9.
Click Configuration from the configuration menu and select Drift.
10. Click drift from the fly-out menu. The drift calibrations screen will
appear.
11. Include or exclude an element by clicking a row to select the

drift calculation will be calculated for that element.
12. Click OK to calculate the drift based on the analysis result
obtained in step 2.
538
CHN628
Operation
Samples
Sample Editing Functions
Insert a Sample
If a sample is going to be added to the last row of the spreadsheet,
sample login should be used. If a sample should be inserted out of
sequence, between unanalyzed samples, Insert a Sample should be
used.
An analysis method should be developed before a sample is logged
in. Refer to Method Configuration on page 436.
1.
Click and select a row in the spreadsheet after the last analyzed
sample. Insert will insert a row before the selected row.
2.
From the Edit menu, click Insert. A row will be inserted into the
spreadsheet before the selected row.
Fill Cells with the Same

A group of cells in the spreadsheet can be quickly filled with the same
data. As an example, the method could be changed in a group of
logged in unanalyzed samples.
1.
Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the cells to fill with the
same data.
In the following example the mouse pointer was dragged over
the Operator cells to be filled with the same operators name.
Operation
2.
From the Edit menu, click Fill. The Fill screen will appear.
3.
Enter the data to fill into each selected cell.
4.
Click OK.
CHN628
539
Delete a Sample
Use Delete a Sample to remove a sample row from the spreadsheet.
1.
Select a row in the spreadsheet to delete. If more than one row

should be deleted, click and drag the mouse pointer down the
desired number of rows to delete. More than one row will be
selected.
2.
From the Samples menu, click Delete.
3.
Click Yes to delete the row or rows of sample information. The

selected sample information will be deleted from the spreadsheet.
It is not possible to restore this data once its deleted.
If a database is created with log activity enabled, a deleted sample

can be viewed by setting the Presentation Time to a time prior to the
deletion.
Recalculate Results
1.
Select the samples in the spreadsheet to recalculate.
2.
From the Samples menu, click Recalculate. The selected samples

will be recalculated using the new calibration.
Results are automatically recalculated when a field in the spreadsheet

is edited (ex. name, mass, method, analysis date, etc.).
If the calibration is changed, it can be reapplied by following the
procedure above.
540
CHN628
Operation
Display Protein Results

The nitrogen analysis results can be displayed as percent protein.
A protein factor may be defined during login. Verify a factor has been
defined. Refer to Typical Protein Factors.
A protein factor may be entered in the spreadsheet if the field is
visible.
Operation
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Display. The Sample Display

2.
Select Protein % from the Invisible Fields edit box.
3.
Click Show to move protein % from the Invisible Fields to the

Visible Fields edit box.
4.
Click OK to display protein % and protein factor in the

spreadsheet.
CHN628
541
Typical Protein Factors

Product
Protein Factors
Wheat Products
5.70
Almonds
5.18
Peanuts
5.46
Tree Nuts
5.30
Coconuts
5.30
Dairy Products
6.38
Other Products
6.25
View History
View History permits the operator or laboratory manager to look at a
history log of the actions performed on a selected sample.
542
1.
Select a sample in the spreadsheet to View History of.
2.
Click the Samples menu and select View History. The View History
screen will appear. Refer to the following View History Definitions.
3.
Click the Local Time button, in the Time screen, to display the
time in local 12-hour time.
4.
Click the UTC button, in the Time screen, to display the time in
Universal Coordinated Time.
5.
Click OK to exit view history.
CHN628
Operation
View History Definitions

Date and TimeThe date and time the action took place.
ActionThe type of action performed on the sample. Examples are:
Created the sample, modified the sample, and recalculated the
sample.
UserThe Operator that performed the action.
Sample Signature
A signature confirms that a user has accepted the sample information
displayed in the spreadsheet. Any change to the sample information
after it is signed will clear the signature. The signature can be used to
ensure that the validity of the sample information has remained the
same since it was signed.
To view a sample signature, after it has been signed, refer to View
Signature on page 544.
Operation
1.
Click on a row, in the spreadsheet, to select a sample to sign.
2.
Click the Samples menu and select Sign. The Sign screen will
appear.
A.
A name will appear in the Name Entry box. It will be the

name of the logged-on Windows user. If desired the name
can be changed. Its suggested that the current operators
name be used.
B.
If desired, a description can be entered in the Description

Entry box. This can be additional information about the
sample or an event that took place. Any text can be entered.
CHN628
543
C.
To display the time in local 12-hour time, click the Local

button. To display the time in Universal Coordinated Time,
click the UT button.
D.
Click OK to enter the signature.
The system name, user name, date, and time are obtained from the
Windows operating system. They cannot be changed from this
screen.
View Signatures
View Signatures permits the operator or laboratory manager to view a
sample signature and determine if it is valid. A sample must be signed
before the signature can be viewed. Refer to Sample Signature on
page 543.
If information associated with the sample was changed after it was
signed, the signature will be cleared and the view signatures screen
will not appear in step 2.
544
1.
Click on a row to select a sample from the spreadsheet to view.
2.
Click the Samples menu and select View Signatures. The View
Signatures screen will appear.
3.
Click OK when finished viewing the signature information.
CHN628
Operation
Printing Reports
Configuring Report before Printing
A report of analysis results can be generated and printed on the
system printer. The following section explains how to use the Report
Settings dialog box to determine the format of the report.
1.
In the spreadsheet, select the samples as follows:

A.
Place cursor in the column under row until a black arrow

displays.
B.
Hold down right mouse key and drag the mouse over the
desired samples.
C.
Unclick the mouse. Selected samples appear highlighted in

blue.
2.
Click Samples and select Print Preview. Click Print Preview to

access the Report Settings dialog box in order to preview how
selected samples will print on the system printer. The Report
Settings Screen will appear.
3.
Configure the report by clicking the Report tab, Field tab, Font
Tab, and Element tab and entering the desired settings as
explained in the following steps. The Fields tab will only appear
when Define Report Fields is checked on the Report tab.
4.
On the Report Tab,

A.
Operation
Click the arrow next to Report Format to determine the

format of the report.
Click Report with Plots to display a report with data

plotted.
Click Tabular Report to display data in a table.
Click Simple Print to display a report based on the

columns that appear in the spreadsheet. This report can
then be printed.
CHN628
545
B.
5.
546
Click Group Report to display the average, the standard

deviation, and the relative standard deviation when
multiple samples are selected.
Click Ambients to display ambients.
Click Hardware Calibration to display the hardware

calibration.
Click the arrow next to Statistics to select how statistics will

display.
Select None, and statistics will not display.
Select Report with Plot, and statistics will display as a

line plot.
Select Tabular Report, and statistics will display in a

table.
C.
For Heading Text, enter a title for the report, if desired.
D.
Select the Define Report Fields check box and the Fields tab
will display. Use the Fields tab to select the columns from
the spreadsheet that will display in the report.
E.
For Line Printing, select the Automatically Print after Each

Analysis check box. Enable line printing when printing with a
dot matrix printer.
F.
When Line Printing is enabled, the Automatically Print After

Each Analysis checkbox is enabled. When selected, a report
will automatically print after each analysis.
Complete the Fields tab as follows to determine the fields that

display in the report. The Fields tab will only display when Define
Report Fields is checked on the Report tab. Fields that appear
vary, depending on the instrument.
CHN628
Operation
To display a Field that does not appear in the report, select

the field from Invisible Fields, and then click Show. The
Field will automatically move to the Visible Fields column.
To remove a Field so that it does not display in the report,

select the field from Visible Fields and then click Hide. The
Field will automatically move to the Invisible Fields column.
To display the default fields, click Default.
To move a field so that it displays earlier in the report,

select the Field from the Visible Fields column and click
Promote until the field displays in the desired position.
To move a field so that it displays later in the report, select

the Field from the Visible Fields column and click Demote
until the field appears in the desired position.
6.
Use the Font tab to configure the text in the report to improve the
readability of the report. Refer to Modifying Font.
7.
Use the Elements tab to determine the elements that display in

the report. Refer to Configuring Plot Properties.
Printing from the Software
Operation
1.
From the spreadsheet, select the desired samples that have been
analyzed to print. When several samples are selected, the
software will group the samples by sample name.
2.
Click Samples and click Print. Clicking Print or Print Preview will
open the Report Settings dialog box.
3.
Refer to Configuring Report before Printing, page 545, to format

the report as desired.
4.
From the Samples menu, click Print Setup. The Page Setup dialog
box will display.
CHN628
547
5.
Use the Page Setup dialog box to change the size, orientation,
and margins of the paper before printing.
When multiple columns are selected to appear in the report, the font
and page orientation can be adjusted to improve the readability of
the report. The font size can be changed using the font tab as
described in Configuring Report before Printing, page 545.
548
6.
Click OK. The Print dialog box will appear.
7.
Click OK to print.
CHN628
Operation
Text Export Data

Before sample data can be exported an export format must be
configured.
Multiple export formats can be configured.
Export Configuration
Filename
Operation
1.
Select the Configuration menu and click Text Export Formats. The
Export Format Screen will appear.
2.
To move a selected method up towards the top of the list select it

and click Promote.
3.
To move the selected method down towards the bottom of the list
select it and click Demote.
4.
Select Ascending to list the method in ascending alphabetical

order.
5.
Select Descending to list the method in descending alphabetical

order.
CHN628
549
6.
Click Properties to configure the text export format. The Filename

screen will appear.
7.
Enter a filename for the exported file or click browse and search
for a file name.
8.
Click Append to File, Automatically increment Filename or Prompt

for Filename as desired. Refer to Export Configuration Definitions
on page 550.
9.
Click OK to save the changes and exit.
10. Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.

Export Definitions
Append to FileWhen selected, the highlighted sample analysis data
will be attached to the previously saved file.
Automatically Increment FilenameIf the filename contains numbers,
they will automatically be incremented by one when the file is saved.
Prompt for FilenameWhen selected, the export filename screen will
appear when exporting a file, prompting the operator to enter a
filename.
550
CHN628
Operation
Fields
Operation
1.
Click the Fields tab. The Fields Format Screen will appear. Select
the desired fields to export in the file.
2.
To Add an invisible field select the field and click Add.
3.
To Remove a visible field select the field and click Remove.
4.
To move a selected field up towards the top of the list, click

Promote.
5.
To move the selected field down towards the bottom of the list,
click Demote.
6.
7.
Click Cancel to exit this procedure without making changes.
CHN628
551
Delimiters
552
1.
Click the Delimiters tab. The Delimiters Format Screen will

appear. Select the desired delimiters to export in the file.
2.
Click XML to export the text data in XML format. If XML is

selected no other parameters in the screen can be configured.
3.
Click Column Header to transmit the column header.
4.
Select or enter the Field, Start of Transmission, and End of Line

delimiters.
5.
6.
CHN628
Operation
Automation
Operation
1.
Click the Automation tab. The Automation Format Screen will

appear.
2.
Select Automatically export each new analysis to automatically

export the analysis data after every analysis.
3.
4.
CHN628
553
Advanced
554
1.
Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Format Screen will appear.
2.
Position the cursor in the Export Format and click the mouse to
place the cursor at the point in the format to edit a field.
3.
Select a Field from the Fields box and click Add Field to Export
Format to add a field.
4.
Highlight a Field in the Export Format and then press Delete on

the keyboard to delete it.
5.
6.
CHN628
Operation
Preview
1.
Click the Preview tab. The Preview Export Format Screen will
appear.
This is a status screen to view the export data format. The export
format cannot be changed from this screen.
2.
Operation
Click OK or Cancel to exit.
CHN628
555
Export Text Data

Text Export Data permits the operator to select sample data and
export that data to a file. Sample data can be inserted into an Excel
spreadsheet from the exported file.
1.
Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the rows with sample
data to export to a file.
If no sample is selected only the last sample in the spreadsheet will

be exported and saved.
2.
Click the Sample menu and select Text Export Data. The Export
Format selection screen will appear.
The format selection screen will not appear unless there is more than
one format selected.
556
CHN628
Operation
Operation
3.
Select the Export Format and click OK. The Export Filename
4.
Enter a Filename and File Type.
5.
Click Save to export and save the file.
CHN628
557
Export Text Buffers

Text Export Buffers permits the operator to select sample plot data
and export that data to a file. Sample plot data can be inserted into an
Excel spreadsheet from the exported file.
1.

be exported and saved.
2. Click the Sample menu and select Text Export Buffers. The Export
Buffers Filename selection screen will appear.
File extensions of (.txt) or (.csv) are good choices to insert the saved
files into an Excel spreadsheet.
3. Enter a filename and extension. Click Save to export and save the
file.
558
CHN628
Operation
Text Import Data

Text Import Data permits the operator to import sample data from
another application such as an Excel spreadsheet.
1.
Click the Sample menu and select Text Import Data. The Import
File selection screen will appear.
2. Select the file to import.

3. Click Open to import the file.
Operation
CHN628
559
Transmit Data
Before sample data can be transmitted to a peripheral devise an
transmit format must be configured.
Multiple transmit formats can be configured.
Transmit Format Configuration

1.
Click the Configuration menu and select Transmission Formats.

The Transmission Formats screen will appear.
2. To add a new transmission format to the list, click Add and enter a
transmission format name in the row that appears at the bottom of
the list.
3. To move a selected transmission format up towards the top of the
list select it and click Promote.
4. To move the selected transmission format down towards the
bottom of the list select it and click Demote.
5. Select Ascending to list the transmission formats in ascending
alphabetical order.
6. Select Descending to list the transmission formats in descending
alphabetical order.
7. To delete a transmission format, select it and click Delete.
8. Click OK to save any changes and exit.
560
CHN628
Operation
Fields
1.
Select the transmission format from the transmission format

screen and click Properties. The Transmission Format Properties
screen will appear with the Fields tab selected.
2. To add a transmit field select the field and click Add.

3. To remove a transmit field select the field and click Remove.
4. To move a selected field up towards the top of the list, click
Promote.
5. To move the selected field down towards the bottom of the list,
click Demote.
6. Click OK to save the changes and exit.
Operation
CHN628
561
Delimiters
1.
Click the Delimiters tab. The Delimiters Format Screen will

appear. Select the desired delimiters to export in the file.
2. Click XML to export the text data in XML format. If XML is selected
no other parameters in the screen can be configured.
3. Click Column Header to transmit the column header.
4. Select or enter the Field, Start of Transmission, and End of Line
delimiters.
562
CHN628
Operation
Automation
Operation
1.
Click the Automation tab. The Automation Format Screen will

appear.
2.
Select automatically export each new analysis to automatically

export the analysis data after every analysis.
3.
4.
CHN628
563
Communication Settings
564
1.
Click the Communications Settings tab. The Communications

Settings Configuration screen will appear.
2.
Click the radio button and select either Unicode or ASCII

encoding.
3.
Click the radio button and select Serial Port or Network.
CHN628
Operation
4.
Click Configure to configure serial or network communications.
5.
If serial port was selected the Serial Port Configuration screen will
appear. Select the Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, Stop Bits
and Flow Control.
6. If network port was selected the Network Port Configuration screen

will appear. Contact your network administrator to configure the
network port.

Serial Port Definitions
Baud RateSets the data transmission speed in bits per second.
Selections: 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps. Default: 1200 bps
Data BitsUsed to select the number of bits per byte for data that will
be transmitted. Selections: 5 to 8. Default: 7
ParitySets the method of error checking used. Selections: Even,
Odd, or None. Default: Even
Stop BitsUsed to select the number of bits that are used to signal the
end of a transmitted data byte. Selections: 1 or 2. Default: 1
Flow ControlSelects the type of data flow control. Selections:
Software (xon/xoff), Hardware or None.
Operation
CHN628
565
Advanced
566
1.
Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Transmission Format

screen will appear.
2.
Position the cursor in the Export Format and click the mouse to
place the cursor at the point in the format to edit a field.
3.
Select a Field from the Fields box and click Add Field to Export
Format to add a field.
4.
Highlight a Field in the Export Format and then press Delete on

the keyboard to delete it.
5.
6.
CHN628
Operation
Preview
1.
Click the Preview tab. The Preview Transmission Format Screen

will appear.
This is a status screen to view the transmit data format. The

transmission format cannot be changed from this screen.
2.
Operation
Click OK or Cancel to exit.
CHN628
567
Transmit Selected Samples

Transmit Data permits the operator to select sample data and transmit
the data to a peripheral device. Sample data can be transmitted from
a serial port or over a network.
Before data is transmitted a transmission data format must be
defined. Refer to Transmit Data Format Configuration on page 560.
1. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the rows with sample
data to transmit.
be transmitted.
2. Click the Sample menu and select Transmit. The Transmission

Format selection screen will appear.
The transmission format selection screen will not appear unless there
is more than one format selected.
3. Select the Transmission Format and click OK to transmit the

selected sample data. Click Cancel to exit without transmitting any
data.
568
CHN628
Operation
Data Backup
Data Backup permits the operator or manager to export sample data
to a file. The file can be saved on the systems hard drive or
transferred to another media for safe storage. If necessary, the file
can be imported and the sample data restored. Refer to Transfer
Import on page 571.
Transfer Export
1.
2. Click the Sample menu and select Transfer Export. The export file
Operation
CHN628
569
3. Select the folder to store the sample data and enter a unique file
name without an extension. The software will automatically add the
proper file extension.
4. Click Save to export and save the sample data to a file.
570
CHN628
Operation
Transfer Import
Transfer Import restores sample data that was saved as a file by
Transfer Export. Refer to Transfer Export on page 569.
Operation
1.
Click the Sample menu and select Transfer Import. The Import
File selection screen will appear.
2.
Select the File to import by clicking on the file name.
3.
Click Open. The sample data stored in the file will be restored as
the last samples in the spreadsheet.
CHN628
571
Error Messages
Error messages that appear on the screen warn the operator of a
condition that could yield an incorrect result or notify the operator of a
component failure. Operator problems are most likely to occur after a
manual procedure or a change in the setup, method, or system control
parameters. When an error message occurs, refer to Error Message
Definitions on page 572 for corrective action.
Please report any errors that are not defined on page 572 to the
LECO Service Department.
Error Message Definitions

Analysis Errors
Message
Cause
Actions
A mass must be entered

to analyze a sample.
No mass for sample
Enter a mass for the

sample to be analyzed
A method must be defined

to analyze a sample.
No method defined for

sample
Select a method for the

sample to be analyzed
Not Ready - <reason>
Hardware not ready to

analyze sample
Fix or wait for indicated

reason
Pause
Message
Cause
Actions
The date entered is not a

valid date
Invalid data for Pause
Enter a valid date for the

pause
First select an unanalyzed

sample before selecting
this command.
Tried to Pause an analyzed

sample
Only use Pause on

unanalyzed samples
Analysis Warnings
Message
The <element name>
answer is outside the\n
standards defined control
limits.\n
572
Cause
Elements results are
outside the specified
control limits for the
defined standard
CHN628
Actions
Check the analysis for
anomalies, possibly need
to drift the instrument.
Operation
Leak Check
Message
Cause
Actions
Failed to pressurize
system for leak check.
Could not pressurize the

system to check for leaks
Trouble shoot leak check

for pressurization leak
Failed Stabilization
Pressure did not stabilize

after pressurizing for Leak
Check

Leak Check early

termination on step <step
number>
Big leak

Leak ( <step number> )
Leak in the indicated step

Overpressure ( <step
number> )
Overpressured in indicated
step

at indicated step
Carousel Interaction
Message
Cause
Actions
To use Location, go to
system configuration and
select the number of
carousels being used.
Number of carousels is set

to 0
Enter the number of

carousels to be used, or
do not try to enter a
location value
Current location range is

<minimum value> <maximum value>
Entered invalid location

value
Enter a location value in

the proscribed range
Application Software
Message
Cause
Actions
The application is already

running.
Trying to open another

instance of CHN628 while
the application is running
Only run one instance of

the application at a time
You must first exit the

application before shutting
down.
Session did not end,

because you must shut
down the application first
Shut down the application

and then try to end the
session
The selected language

module could not be
loaded.
Language module missing
Reinstall the software and

retry
Missing IR Cell
Linearization <file name>
Missing linearization file
Reinstall the software and

retry
Operation
CHN628
573
Software Registration
Message
Cause
Actions
The registration
information could not be
saved.
Unable to save the

registration number for
CHN628, most likely to
Permission restrictions on
the user
Log on as Administrator
and try entering the
registration number again
Invalid software
registration.
Incorrect software
registration number for
the instrument and the
entered configuration
Verify that the instrument

is powered, the
information in the
registration box is correct.
Contact LECO for a correct
registration number
Equipment number does

not match.
Improper register code

has been entered
Contact LECO
Blank Calibration
Message
Cause
Actions
First select the blanks to

use for setting the new
method blank area before
selecting this command.
No samples selected
Select the samples to be

used
The selected blanks must

all have a method before
setting the new method
blank area.
No method in one or more

of the selected samples
Select a method for each

sample to be used

all have been analyzed
before setting the new
method blank area.
One or more of the

selected samples have not
been analyzed
Analyze all of the samples

to be used
The selected samples must

all be blanks before
setting the new method
blank area.
Selection include some

sample other than blanks
Select only blanks and try

again

all refer to the same
method before setting the
new method blank area.
Selected samples refer to

multiple methods
Select only samples with

the same method
574
CHN628
Operation
Message
Cause
Actions
WARNING: The sample

blank on one or more
samples does not match
the current method
blank.\n Do you wish to
recalculate the selected
results for the current
method blank?
Not all calibration samples

are using the same blank
Decide whether to
continue with calibration
with using different or the
same blank value
Warning: This action will

change all cells to use
single standard calibration.
Do you still want to make
the change?
Select an element to use

Single Standard
Calibration
Decide whether to select

Single Standard
Calibration for all elements
Warning: This action will

change all other cells from
single standard calibration
to linear calibration. Do
you still want to make the
change?
Selected an element to
switch from Single
Standard Calibration to a
regular curve order
Decide whether to stay in

Single Standard
Calibration for all elements
or switch out of that mode
The selected standards

must all have a mass
before creating a
calibration.
No mass for one or more

selected samples
Enter a mass for all

samples

must all have a method
before creating a
calibration.
No method in one or more

of the selected samples
Select a method for each

sample to be used

must all have been
analyzed before creating a
calibration.
One or more of the

selected samples have not
been analyzed
Analyze all of the samples

to be used

must all refer to the same
method before creating a
calibration.
Selected samples refer to

multiple methods
Select only samples with

the same method
First select the standards

to use for calibration
before selecting this
command.
No samples selected

used
The selected samples must

all be standards before
creating a calibration.
Samples selected are not

standards
Select only standards
Drift Failed
Error in UI grid creation or

database access
Exit, restart and retry
Operation
CHN628
575
Message
Cause
Actions
No drifts to show.
No drift history
Action only accessible

when there is a drift
history
There are no drift

standards defined.
No drift standards defined

for the method
Pick drift standards for the

method from the
calibration window
Warning: This sample is

used in calibration. This
change will invalidate the
current calibration and/or
drift. Do you still want to
make the change?
Changing a sample used

for calibrating a method
Decide whether to accept

the sample change and its
effect on calibration
Maintenance Counters
Message
Cause
Actions
This counter is required

and cannot be deleted.
Tried to delete a required

counter
Do not try to delete

required counters
A counter with name

<name> already exists
Trying to create a new

counter
Use a different name
Balance
Message
The balance is sending
more frequently than
allowed.\576either the
balance is configured
incorrectly,\nor the print
key on the balance was
pressed twice.
576
Cause
Multiple mass entries from
the balance in rapid
succession
CHN628
Actions
Check balance
communication setting at
the balance and the PC
Operation
Users
Message
Cause
Actions
You do not have

permission to\n<name of
action trying to be
performed>
User is restricted from the

action
Change user permission or

sign on as a user with the
proper permission
Access is Read Only
User is restricted from the

action
Change user permission or

sign on as a user with the
proper permission
Failed to get the user

name from operating
system.\n Starting
application in guest mode.
Operating system did not

report a user name
Restart system and retry,

contact LECO
User <user name> does

not exist in the
application.\n Contact
administrator to add the
user.\n Starting
application in guest mode.
User name does not exist
Have the user added to

the system or sign on with
a valid user
You cannot remove the

rights to "<user name>"
for the currently logged on
user.
Tried to remove the rights

for the currently logged on
user
Alter the permissions from

the administrator user
Cause
Actions
Standards
Message
You cannot name a
standard blank
Tried to name a standard

Blank
Do not name standards

Blank. It is reserved for
application use
You cannot delete

standard <standard
name>.\nIt is referenced
by a sample.
Tried to delete a standard

still in use
Delete all references to

the standard before
deleting the standard
A standard with name


standard
Operation
CHN628
577
Sample
Message
Cause
Actions
You cannot delete sample

"<sample name>".\n It is
referenced by a
calibration.
Tried to delete a sample

used by calibration
Remove sample from

calibration if it needs to be
deleted
First select the samples to

recalculate before
No samples selected

used
One or More Cell(s) are

Not Editable
Entering data into field

that is not editable
Do not enter data into

uneditable fields
There are no samples to

delete.
No sample in the sample

log
The sample that is

currently being analyzed
was not deleted.
Cannot delete a sample

while it is being analyzed
Either stop the analysis

and then delete the
sample or wait for the
analysis to complete

delete before selecting this
command.
No samples selected

used
Sample Template
Message
A sample template with
name <name> already
exists
578
Cause
sample template
CHN628
Actions
Operation
Method
Message
Cause
Actions
Methods have been lost

for the following sample
rows:\n<row numbers>\n
The method <method
name> with default
settings has been
created\n and inserted
into each of the above
sample rows.
Method missing
Software created default

method, samples and
method must be reviewed
for integrity.
You will need to

recalibrate
method(s):\n<method
names>
Calibrations were missing

from the names methods
Calibrate each of the

methods
You cannot delete method

<method name>.\n It is
referenced by a sample.
Trying to delete a method

which is still in use
Delete all samples and

other information
referenced by the method
before deleting the
method
The method <method

name> does not exist.
Tried to enter the name of

a non-existent method
Select and existing

method or create a
method with that name
A method with name


method
Operation
CHN628
579
Export
Message
Cause
Actions
Could not open the

file\n<file name> for
exporting.\n
This error can occur when

trying to export a file
Verify that the file was not

deleted or moved.; Verify
that the file is not a read
only file or it is currently
open.; Retry exporting
with a different name; If
error persists, contact
LECO

be exported before
No samples selected

used
An error occurred
exporting the method(s).
Database or file error
Retry with different export

target
An error occurred
importing the method(s).
Retry with different import

target
An error occurred
exporting the sample(s).
Retry with different export

target
An error occurred
importing the sample(s).
Retry with different import

target
580
CHN628
Operation
Quality Control
Message
Cause
Actions
Checks failed and no drift

is scheduled.
Check standard failed and

no drift action
Drift the instrument
Checks failed beyond the

retry count.
Checks have failed too

many times
Examine check standards
Drift Calibration
Message
Drift Mass Range Error :
Nominal Mass (<nominal
mass>); Range
(<acceptable mass
range>); Value Entered
(<entered mass value>)
Cause
Entered a mass value
outside the acceptable
range for the drift
standard
Actions
Only enter mass ranges
appropriate to the drift
standard
Transmit
Message
Cause
Actions
There are no samples to

transmit.
No sample in the sample

log

transmit before selecting
this command.
No samples selected

used
A transmission format
must be defined to
transmit a sample.
A data transmit format has

not been set up for this
method
Create a data transmit

format for the method.
See setup transmission
formats
A communications error
occurred while
transmitting.
AN undefined error
occurred during data
transmit
Verify the port exists, is

active, and not is use by
other applications; If error
persists contact LECO
External Sulfur Application Start

Message
Actions
The CHN628 External Sulfur option is not

registered. The software is closing.
Sulfur was not listed as a registered
option.
Contact LECO for registration with Sulfur
Operation
CHN628
581
582
CHN628
Operation
Maintenance
The Maintenance chapter includes procedures that should be
performed on a regular basis to improve the instrument's performance
and life span.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 63
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 64
Air Filter Cleaning.......................................................................... 66
Aliquot Dosing Valve Cleaning ......................................................... 67
Ballast Tank Cleaning .................................................................... 69
Ballast Assembly Removal ......................................................... 69
Ballast Assembly Removal ......................................................... 69
Ballast Cleaning ..................................................................... 610
Ballast Tubing ........................................................................ 610
Carousel Cleaning ....................................................................... 617
Reduction Heater Tube Packing ..................................................... 619
Combustion Tube Removal and Replacement .................................. 623
Combustion Tube Packing ............................................................ 629
Crucible Replacement .................................................................. 632
Loading Head Cleaning................................................................. 634
Disassembly .......................................................................... 634
Reassembly ........................................................................... 637
O-rings ...................................................................................... 638
Reagent Tube Packing.................................................................. 639
Removal ............................................................................... 639
Packing ................................................................................. 639
Install ................................................................................... 639
Primary Furnace Filters Cleaning ................................................... 641
Removal ............................................................................... 641
Cleaning ............................................................................... 641
Install ................................................................................... 641
Balston Filter Replacement ...................................................... 641
Secondary Wire Screen Filter Inspection and Replacement ............... 643
Removal ............................................................................... 643
Replacement: ........................................................................ 643
Login Periodic Maintenance ........................................................... 644
View Log File .............................................................................. 645
Maintenance
CHN628
61
Configure Maintenance Counters ................................................... 646

Maintenance Counter Definitions .............................................. 647
Reset Maintenance Counters ......................................................... 648
62
CHN628
Maintenance
Illustrations
Figure 6-1 Aliquot Dosing Valve .......................................................68
Figure 6-2 Ballast Top Assembly ......................................................611
Figure 6-3 Ballast Connections .........................................................612
Figure 6-4 C-Flex Tubing Connection ................................................613
Figure 6-5 Stainless Line from Ballast to Doser Disconnected ...............614
Figure 6-6 Ballast Disassembly ........................................................615
Figure 6-7 Carousel Bottom View .....................................................617
Figure 6-8 Carousel Bearings ...........................................................618
Figure 6-9 Reduction Heater ............................................................621
Figure 6-10 Packing the Reduction Heater Tube .................................622
Figure 6-11 Furnace Interface Blocks ................................................625
Figure 6-12 Afterburner Interface Block ............................................626
Figure 6-13 Furnace Latch Pin..........................................................626
Figure 6-14 Combustion Furnace Assembly .......................................627
Figure 6-15 Secondary Wire Screen Filter ..........................................628
Figure 6-16 Lance Assembly ............................................................630
Figure 6-17 Combustion Tube Packing ..............................................631
Figure 6-18 Loading Head Removal Screws .......................................633
Figure 6-19 Lance Removal .............................................................633
Figure 6-20 Slide Block Removal ......................................................634
Figure 6-21 Slide Block (Bottom View) ..............................................635
Figure 6-22 Lance Shield and Lance Tool ...........................................636
Figure 6-23 Female Jaw and Loading Pin ...........................................636
Figure 6-24 Reagent Tube Packing ...................................................640
Figure 6-25 Filter Locations .............................................................642
Maintenance
CHN628
63
Periodic Maintenance Schedule

The following schedule is a list of maintenance procedures that
should be performed on a regular basis. For more information
concerning periodic maintenance and periodic maintenance
procedures, refer to the individual topics.
In order to obtain the best possible analysis results periodic

maintenance must be performed at the intervals listed
below.
Maintenance Item
64
Location of
Maintenance Item
Inspection,
Cleaning, and
Maintenance
Interval
Air Filter Cleaning
On the top of the

instrument cabinet.
Vacuum daily and

wash monthly to
prevent clogging.
Refer to page 66.
Aliquot Dosing Valve
In ballast oven inside

left hand side panel.
Clean monthly to
prevent leak check
failure. Refer to page
67.
Ballast Tank
In ballast oven inside

left hand side panel.
Clean monthly or if
the ballast leak check
fails or soot or ash is
visible. Refer to page
69.
Carousel Cleaning
On top of the loading

head assembly.
The carousel should

be cleaned weekly.
Refer to page 617.
Reduction Heater
Tube Packing
Inside catalyst heater

assembly. WARNING:
Disconnect facility
power and let catalyst
heater cool before
removing reduction
heater tube.
Replace about every

750 analysis. Refer to
page 619.
Combustion Tube
Packing
Inside furnace
assembly. WARNING:
Disconnect facility
power and let furnace
cool before removing
combustion tube.
Replace if cracked,
plugged or about
every 1500 analysis.
Refer to page 629.
CHN628
Maintenance
Maintenance Item
Maintenance
Location of
Maintenance Item
Inspection,
Cleaning, and
Maintenance
Interval
Heated Quartz
Particulate Filter
Inside Afterburner
Interface Block.
Replace when
packing the
combustion tube.
Refer to page 629.
Crucible
Replacement
Inside combustion
tube. Remove loading
head and use tongs to
remove crucible.
WARNING: Furnace
may be hot.
Refer to page 632.
Loading Head
Cleaning
On top of the furnace

shelf above the furnace
assembly.
Inspect every day

and clean ashes and
soot if necessary.
Refer to page 634.
Incoming Helium
Scrubber, Repacking
the Reagent Tube
Behind the access door

on the front panel of
instrument.
Replace every 90
days or when
anhydrone cakes or
lecosorb changes
colors. Refer to page
639.
Aliquot Dose,
Repacking the
Reagent Tube
Behind the access door

on the front panel of
instrument.
Replace at counter
limit (approximately
750). Refer to page
639.
O-rings
Located in various
assemblies, reagent
tubes, and loading
head.
Replace when
repacking or
replacing the reagent
tubes, cleaning an
assembly, or when
damaged. Refer to
page 638.
Primary furnace filter

cleaning
Inside front door.
As necessary when
visibly dirty.
Balston filter
Inside front door.
As necessary when
visibly dirty.
CHN628
65
Air Filter Cleaning

The air filter should be vacuumed daily and washed monthly to
prevent clogging.
1.
Locate the air filter inside the left side of the instrument.
2.
Remove the air filter by removing the plastic housing.
3.
Inspect the air filter for damage. If it is damaged replace it.
4.
Wash the air filter with a mild solution of detergent and water. Let
it air dry.
To prevent damage to the instrument verify the air filter is

completely dry before reinstalling it on the instrument.
66
5.
Lightly spray the air filter with air filter coating.
6.
Install the air filter back into the instrument.
CHN628
Maintenance
Aliquot Dosing Valve Cleaning

The aliquot dosing valve should be cleaned monthly to remove dirt
and other contaminants that may cause the valve to leak.
1.
Permit the furnaces to cool and shut down the instrument. Refer
to the Shutdown Procedure on page 512.
2.
Disconnect the instrument from the facility AC power source.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD

this voltage can be fatal. Disconnect the instrument from
the facility AC power source before continuing with this
procedure.
3.
Remove the Left Side Panel and locate the Aliquot Dosing Valve.
4.
Remove dead-stop.
5.
Press in on the retaining clip and remove the valve stem by

grasping the knurled knob and pull it to the left, Figure 6-1, page
68.
6.
Use a cotton swab or pipe cleaner to clean the valve block.
7.
Inspect o-rings for damage and replace if necessary.
8.
Wipe the valve stem and apply a thin coat of vacuum grease to
the 10 o-rings.
9.
Press in on the retaining clip and reinsert the valve stem into the
top of the aliquot dosing valve, until valve stem locks into place.
10. Reinstall dead-stop.

11. Reinstall the left side panel.
12. Connect the instrument to the facility AC power source.
13. Turn the power switch on.
Maintenance
CHN628
67
Figure 6-1
Aliquot Dosing Valve
68
CHN628
Maintenance
Ballast Tank Cleaning

If the ballast portion of the oxygen leak check fails repeatedly and no
leaks are found in other areas, a dirty ballast tank could be the cause.
Ballast Assembly Removal
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD

procedure.
Ballast Assembly Removal

1.
Click Diagnostics and toggle the Piston Return Solenoid SV12. The
box should NOT be checked.
2.
Disconnect the pneumatic tubing quick connect, Figure 6-3, page

612.
3.
Disconnect the electrical cannon plug, Figure 6-3, page 612.
4.
Loosen the ballast manifold thumbscrew and separate connection

manifold , Figure 6-3, page 612.
5.
Remove the stainless line from the flex tubing connection by

pulling the stainless line up and out of the flex tubing connection,
Figure 6-4, page 613.
6.
Loosen nut at the end of the stainless line, do not completely

remove, Figure 6-4, page 613.
7.
Rotate stainless line down so it is out of the way, Figure 6-5,

page 614.
8.
Remove the thumbscrew securing the top of the ballast assembly

to the rear of the instrument, Figure 6-2, page 611.
9.
Disconnect the pneumatic tubing connection at the top of the

ballast assembly, Figure 6-2, page 611
10. Lift the ballast and pinch valve assembly up and slide it out of the
instrument.
11. Mark, identify, and disconnect the tubing and pinch valve
electrical connections to the ballast assembly.
A. Remove the thumbscrew securing the pinch valve assembly to
the ballast.
B. Disconnect the tubing and electrical connections at the base of
the ballast assembly.
C. Remove the pinch valve assembly from the ballast.
Maintenance
CHN628
69
Ballast Cleaning
1.
Remove the four nuts and four rods. Refer to Figure 6-6 on page
615.
2.
Remove, clean and inspect the o-ring and replace the neoprene
gaskets. Replace o-ring if there is any evidence of wear.
3.
Remove the ballast top and ballast base and push the piston out
of the ballast tank.
4.
Wash the piston, ballast top, ballast tank and ballast bottom with
soapy water, rinse, and let dry.
5.
Lightly grease the inside of the ballast tank. The piston should
slide easily from end to end. Verify the magnet in the piston is
positioned towards the top of the ballast assembly.
6.
Reinstall the ballast top and ballast base.
7.
Inspect all the tubing connection to the ballast assembly. Replace

any tubing that is cracked.
8.
Reinstall the ballast assembly into the instrument. Reverse and

use the Ballast Assembly Removal procedure on page 69.
9.
Reconnect the instrument to the facility AC power source.
10. Turn the AC power switch to the on.

11. Allow the instrument to warm up for one hour then perform the
Leak Check procedure on page 816.
Ballast Tubing
Gas connections on the ballast and pinch valve assemblies are made
with flexible tubing. This tubing is pushed onto barb fitting and metal
tubing to form a gas tight seal. Refer to the figures on pages 611,
612, and 615.
In order to prevent leaks after maintenance, LECO recommends that
the flexible tubing be replaced when the ballast is cleaned or when the
tubing is removed from any fitting.
The flexible tubing is LECO part number 601-691-018 and is provided
in the component pack. Refer to page 131.
610
CHN628
Maintenance
Number
Description
Thumbscrew
Pneumatic Tubing
Figure 6-2
Ballast Top Assembly
Maintenance
CHN628
611
Number
Description
Pneumatic Tubing Quick Connect
Electrical Cannon Plug
Ballast Manifold Thumbscrew

Figure 6-3
Ballast Connections
612
CHN628
Maintenance
Number
Description
C-Flex Tubing to Doser
Stainless Line from Ballast to Doser

Figure 6-4
C-Flex Tubing Connection
Maintenance
CHN628
613
Figure 6-5
Stainless Line from Ballast to Doser Disconnected
614
CHN628
Maintenance
Figure 6-6
Ballast Disassembly
Maintenance
CHN628
615
616
CHN628
Maintenance
Carousel Cleaning
The carousel should be cleaned weekly to remove dirt and permit it to
turn freely.
1.
Remove the carousel from the instrument by pulling it up and off

the loading head, Figure 4-1, page 45.
2.
Remove the four screws securing the bottom plate to the carousel
body.
3.
Wipe the carousel and bottom plate with a damp cloth.
4.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the carousel bearings, Figure 6-8,

page 618.
5.
Reinstall the metal plate.
Figure 6-7
Carousel Bottom View
Maintenance
CHN628
617
Figure 6-8
Carousel Bearings
618
CHN628
Maintenance
Reduction Heater Tube Packing

The reduction reagent materials should be replaced about every 750
analysis if pure helium (99.99% or better) is used. If the helium
carrier is contaminated with oxygen, the copper turnings will deplete
in a shorter period of time.
1.
Set the gas flow to standby.
2.
Remove the aliquot dose reagent tube and replace it with the
purge tube. Position the purge tube with the purge hole towards
the top.
3.
Click Diagnostics and select Furnace. The Furnace Diagnostics

page will appear.
4.
In the Reduction Heater Control Temperature dialog box click

Stop to set the catalyst heater temperature to 20oC.
5.
Wait 30 minutes for the reduction heater to cool.
HIGH TEMPERATURE HAZARD

The catalyst heater tube is extremely hot. Wait for the
catalyst heater tube to cool before removing it.
6.
Loosen the Thumbscrew and tilt the reduction Heater Assembly

forward, Figure 6-9, page 621.
7.
Lift the reduction heater tube and remove it from the reduction
heater assembly.

Set the catalyst heater tube aside on a cooling tray and
allow the catalyst heater tube to cool to room temperature
before proceeding.
8.
Turn the reduction heater tube upside down and place a paper
towel on the counter.
9.
Tap the tube gently on the counter. The contents of the tube will
slowly slide out.
10. Rinse or soak the reduction heater tube for two minutes with cold
water. Tap the reduction heater tube on a waste container until
the copper falls out.
Maintenance
CHN628
619
11. Repack the clean or new reduction heater tube, Figure 6-10 on
page 622.
A.
Pack 1 inch of copper turnings into the bottom of the

reduction heater tube.
B.
Pack 13/4-inches of N-catalyst on top of the copper turnings.

It is only necessary to replace the N-catalyst every second
repacking.
C.
Pour 1/4-inch of copper turnings onto the N-catalyst.
To prevent channeling and increase the number of analyses between

reagent replacements, tap the reduction heater tube on the counter
as you fill it. This will help insure even depletion of the copper sticks.
D.
Fill the reduction heater tube with copper sticks.
12. Reinstall the repacked reduction heater tube into the reduction
heater assembly. Verify the bottom end of the reduction heater
tube is positioned and sealed over the o-ring.
13. Tilt the reduction heater assembly forward and tighten the
knurled screw.
14. In the Reduction Heater Control Temperature dialog box click
Restart to set the reduction heater temperature.
15. Allow the catalyst heater tube to reach operating temperature.
This should take 10 to 15 minutes.
16. Set the gas flow to Analyze and wait 30 seconds for the gas to
escape out the purge tube hole.
17. Remove the purge tube and engage the top of the reagent tube.
Allow three seconds to elapse to the engage the bottom end of
the reduction heater tube.
18. Reset the Reduction Maintenance Counter under Reset
Maintenance Counters on page 648.
19. Run several Blanks Analyses before beginning sample analysis.
620
CHN628
Maintenance
Figure 6-9
Reduction Heater
Maintenance
CHN628
621
Figure 6-10
Packing the Reduction Heater Tube
622
CHN628
Maintenance
Combustion Tube Removal and Replacement

1.
Refer to the Shutdown Procedure on page 512 and turn the

instrument OFF.

The combustion furnace is extremely hot. Wait for the
combustion tube to cool before removing it.
2.
Disconnect the instrument from facility AC power.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD

procedure.
3.
Refer to the Crucible Replacement procedure on page 632 and

remove the loading head.
4.
Remove the furnace top shelf.
5.
Refer to the Crucible Replacement procedure on page 632 and

remove the lance assembly.
6.
Grab the top left corner of the furnace door and pull it open.
7.
Remove the four screws in the loading head interface block and
remove the block, Figure 6-11, page 625.
8.
Remove the afterburner cap, Figure 6-11, page 625.
9.
Remove the four screws in the afterburner interface block and

remove the block, Figure 6-12, page 626.
10. Pull the furnace latch pin out and tilt the bottom of the furnace
towards the front of the instrument. Release the latch pin, lift the
furnace up and pull the furnace toward you. When the furnace is
pulled out as far as it will go (about 2 inches) tilt the bottom of
the furnace up until the latch pin snaps and locks the furnace into
place. Refer to Figure 6-13, page 626.
Maintenance
CHN628
623
11. Remove the two screws securing the furnace bottom assembly
and remove the bottom assembly, Figure 6-14, page 627. Set it
on the inner shelf of the furnace door. There will be an electrical
connection attached to the furnace fan.
12. Wearing gloves, pull the combustion tube out through the bottom
of the furnace.
13. Refer to the Combustion Tube Packing procedure on page 629
and repack the combustion tube.
POSSIBLE COMBUSTION TUBE DAMAGE

Do not touch the lower portion of the combustion tube
without gloves. Body oil can promote devitrification that
may cause the combustion tube to crack.
14. Insert the combustion tube into the furnace. The short end of the
tube should be inserted into the afterburner side of the furnace.
15. If the height of the combustion tube needs to be raised perform
the following steps. If the combustion tube is at the correct height
skip to step 16. If the furnace has been heated, the combustion
tube o-rings may be deformed and should be replaced.
COMBUSTION TUBE HEIGHT ADJUTMENT

Only perform the next steps to adjust the height of the
combustion tube. If the combustion tube height is correct
skip to step 16.
16. Loosen the combustion tube stop on the bottom of the furnace
assembly, Figure 6-14, page 627.
17. Install the furnace bottom assembly.
624
CHN628
Maintenance
Verify Tabs on bottom of furnace are overlapped as shown in Figure

6-14 on page 627.
A.
Raise the combustion tube stop until resistance is met.
B.
Tighten the combustion tube stop screw.
C.
Reinstall the afterburner interface block using the four

screws that were removed from the block, Figure 6-12, page
626.
D.
Clean the Secondary Wire Screen Filter in the afterburner

interface cap with a brush, Figure 6-15, page 628.
18. Reinstall the afterburner cap, Figure 6-11, page 625.

19. Reinstall combustion block, crucible and lance.
20. Reinstall the combustion tube furnace.
21. Replace loading head.
Use a small amount of 773-942 Anti-seize Compound on each of the

four loading head interface block screws.
Figure 6-11
Furnace Interface Blocks
Maintenance
CHN628
625
Use a small amount of 773-942 Anti-seize Compound on each of the

four afterburner interface block screws when reinstalling the loading
head block.
Figure 6-12
Afterburner Interface Block
Figure 6-13
Furnace Latch Pin
626
CHN628
Maintenance
When reassembling furnace, verify Tabs overlap as shown.
Figure 6-14
Combustion Furnace Assembly
Maintenance
CHN628
627
Figure 6-15
Secondary Wire Screen Filter
628
CHN628
Maintenance
Combustion Tube Packing

Replace the combustion tube if it becomes cracked, plugged or about
every 1500 analysis. The combustion tube can be reused even if it
looks cloudy.
The furnace reagents should be dried at 105oC for two hours before
packing the combustion tube.
POSSIBLE COMBUSTION TUBE DAMAGE

Do not touch the lower portion of the combustion tube
without gloves. Body oil can promote devitrification that
may cause the combustion tube to crack.
Maintenance
1.
Remove 1 quartz wool strip from the package. Separate it

lengthwise into 2 sections being careful to match the outside
diameter of the roll to the inside diameter of the combustion
tube. Each section is 3/4-inch wide.
2.
Using the quartz wool extractor, push three rolled quartz wool
strips into the longer end of the combustion tube until the rolls
are properly positioned in the combustion tube, Figure 6-17, page
631.
3.
Using the quartz wool extractor, push three quartz wool rolls into
the shorter end of the combustion tube until the rolls are properly
positioned in the combustion tube.
4.
Pour 50 cc of furnace reagent 501-609-HAZ into the shorter end

of the combustion tube on top of the quartz wool.
5.
Add three quartz wool strips into the shorter end. Be careful to
match the outside diameter of the roll to the inside diameter of
the combustion tube. Each section is 3/4-inch wide.
6.
Insert a honeycomb ceramic plug into the short end of the

combustion tube until it rests on the quartz wool.
7.
Insert the combustion tube into the furnace using the two hightemperature orange o-rings.
8.
In the longer end of the combustion tube, insert the crucible until
it rests on the quartz wool.
CHN628
629
9.
Using the crucible extraction tool. Measure the distance between

the top of the crucible and the top of the lance, as it would be
positioned.
10. Add or remove a small amount of quartz under the crucible to

insure that the bottom of the lance will rest 1/4 inch inside the top
of the crucible.
11. Insert the Lance Assembly into the longer section of the
combustion tube.
190-423
SCREW
(4 REQ'D)
601-442
O-RING
783-276
LANCE HOLDER
COVER
780-831
O-RING
(2 REQ'D)
783-275
LANCE HOLDER
BLOCK
616-146
LANCE
Figure 6-16
Lance Assembly
630
CHN628
Maintenance
Figure 6-17
Combustion Tube Packing
Maintenance
CHN628
631
Crucible Replacement

The crucible and furnace may be hot. To avoid burns, allow
the instrument to cool to room temperature before replacing
the crucible.
1.
Remove the three screws securing the loading head to the

furnace, Figure 6-19, page 633.
After the loading head is removed be careful not to damage

the electrical connector on the bottom.
2.
Lift the loading head and set it aside. It is not necessary to

disconnect the gas lines.
3.
Screw the lance extractor tool into the small hole on the lance
head and remove the lance, Figure 6-20, page 633.
4.
Place the lance and extractor tool inside the front door.
5.
Using the crucible extractor tool, reach into the combustion tube
and grasp the crucible. Lift the crucible out and discard when
cool.
6.
Using the crucible extractor tool, place a new crucible in the

combustion tube and replace the lance and loading head.
To prevent damage to the loading head properly align the

electrical connectors before pushing the loading head onto
the instrument.
632
7.
Allow the crucible to reach operating temperature.
8.
Reset the crucible counter by accessing Reset Maintenance

Counters, page 648.
9.
Run two blank analyses to purge air and moisture from the
system.
CHN628
Maintenance
Figure 6-18
Loading Head Removal Screws
Figure 6-19
Lance Removal
Maintenance
CHN628
633
Loading Head Cleaning

Disassembly
1.
Remove the three screws securing the loading head to the

furnace, Figure 6-18, page 633.
After the loading head is removed be careful not to damage

the electrical connector on the bottom.
2.
Lift the loading head and set it aside. It is not necessary to

disconnect the gas lines.
3.
Release the quick disconnect block and remove the slide block by
pulling it away from the loading head Figure 6-20.
4.
Clean the inner surface of the slide block and piston, Figure 6-21,
page 635.
5.
Clean and inspect the o-ring on the coupling block, Figure 6-20.
6.
Turn the loading head over so the bottom is facing up.
7.
Locate the lance shield, Figure 6-22, page 636.
8.
Screw the lance extractor tool into one of the threaded holes and
remove the shield.
9.
Clean the lance shield.
10. Remove the female jaw, Figure 6-23, page 636. Clean the jaw
and the inside of loading head.
Figure 6-20
Slide Block Removal
634
CHN628
Maintenance
Figure 6-21
Slide Block (Bottom View)
Maintenance
CHN628
635
Figure 6-22
Lance Shield and Lance Tool
Figure 6-23
Female Jaw and Loading Pin
636
CHN628
Maintenance
Reassembly
Maintenance
1.
Insert the female jaw into the male jaw, Figure 6-23, page 636.
2.
Line the pin inside the loading head with the largest hole in the
lance shield.
3.
Apply a very light coat of vacuum grease to the o-ring on the

lance shield
4.
Press the lance shield into the loading head.
5.
Turn the loading head over.
6.
Push the slide block onto the loading head.
7.
Line up the cylinder and slide block.
8.
Latch the quick disconnect block to secure the cylinder to the

slide block.
9.
Reinstall the loading head onto the instrument. Be careful not to

bend the electrical connector on the bottom of the loading head.
CHN628
637
O-rings
When repacking the reagent tubes, catalyst heater tube or cleaning an
assembly, lubricate each o-ring with vacuum grease. O-rings should be
replaced when cracked, dry, burnt, or torn. DO NOT over-lubricate the
o-rings; only apply a light coating of grease.
638
1.
Gently remove o-ring.
2.
Lightly grease each o-ring making sure the grease is applied

evenly without excess build-up.
3.
Reinstall o-ring.
CHN628
Maintenance

Replace reagents when the counter reaches its limit
(approximately 800).
The reagent tube is also referred to as the measure flow scrubber and
the helium scrubber.
Anhydrone is a strong dehydrating agent and potentially

strong oxidant (over 150oC). Do not heat with organic
matter, flammables or combustibles. Avoid contact with
strong acids. Refer to material safety data sheet for safe
handling and storage procedures.
Removal
1.
Turn the Gas OFF.
2.
Remove retaining clip above the aliquot dose tube.
3.
Slide reagent tube upward until the bottom end can swing free.
4.
Tilt out the free reagent tube end.
5.
Pull the reagent tube downward off the top port.
1.
Before repacking the reagent tube, remove all material from the
inside of the reagent tube, rinse the reagent tube with water, and
let it dry.
2.
Insert a screen filter into the bottom of the reagent tube. Position
the o-ring towards the bottom and push the screen filter up into
the reagent tube 1/4-inch, Figure 6-24 on page 640.
3.
Pack 3/4-inch of glass wool into the bottom of the reagent tube.
4.
Fill the bottom 1/3 of the reagent tube with Anhydrone.
5.
Fill the top 2/3 of the reagent tube with Lecosorb.
6.
Firmly pack 1/2-inch to 2/3-inch of glass wool into the top of the
reagent tube.
7.
Reinstall the reagent tube.
8.
Reset the Reagent Tube Counter under Reset Maintenance

Counters, page 648.
9.
Clean excessive reagent from work area.
1.
Push the top end of the reagent tube over the top port.
2.
Tilt the reagent tube inward and pull it down, pushing it over the
bottom port.
3.
Turn the gas on.
Packing
Install
Maintenance
CHN628
639
763-265
GLASS WOOL
619-268
ALIQUOT DOSE
REAGENT TUBE
502-174
LECOSORB
501-171
ANHYDRONE
617-548
INCOMING
HELIUM SCRUBBER
REAGENT TUBE
763-265
GLASS WOOL
775-306
SCREEN FILTER
Figure 6-24
640
CHN628
Maintenance
Primary Furnace Filters Cleaning

Removal
1.
Turn the gas OFF.
2.
Remove screw and open the door. Refer to Figure 6-25,

page 642.
3.
Remove retaining clip above the glass tube on the right.
4.
Slide the furnace filter tube upward until the bottom end can
swing free.
5.
Tilt out the free furnace filter tube end.
6.
Pull the furnace filter tube downward off the top port.
Cleaning
1.
Remove the glass tube on right side, Figure 6-25,

page 642.
2.
Clean and regrease o-rings.
3.
Replace glass wool.
4.
Reinsert glass tube.
5.
Reinstall retaining clip removed is Step 3 above.
1.
Push the top end of the furnace filter tube over the top port.
2.
Tilt the furnace filter tube inward and pull it down, pushing it over
the bottom port.
3.
Turn the gas on.
Install
Balston Filter Replacement

The Balston Filter is a disposable particle filter and should be checked
each day before analysis as dirt particles can cause poor results.
Replace the Balston Filter when filter is visibly dirty.
4.
Turn the gas OFF.
5.
Remove screw and open the door. Refer to Figure 6-25,

page 642.
6.
Slide the Balston Filter upward until the bottom end can swing
free.
7.
Tilt out the free Balston Filter tube end.
8.
Pull the Balston Filter tube downward off the top port.
9.
Replace with new Balston Filter.
10. Push the top end of the Balston Filter tube over the top port.
11. Tilt the Balston Filter tube inward and pull it down, pushing it
over the bottom port.
12. Turn the gas on.
Maintenance
CHN628
641
Figure 6-25
Filter Locations
642
CHN628
Maintenance
Secondary Wire Screen Filter Inspection and

Replacement
Monitor the Secondary Wire Screen Filter regularly for corrosion. If the filter is
corroded replace with a new Secondary Wire Screen Filter.
Removal
1.
Refer to Combustion Tube Removal and Replacement

(page 623) for instruction on accessing the Secondary Wire
Screen Filter.
Replacement:
1.
Maintenance
When Secondary Wire Screen Filter is visibly dirty or corroded,

replace with a new one. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to
remove old filter and simply drop the new one in place.
CHN628
643
Login Periodic Maintenance

After periodic maintenance has been performed, it should be logged in.
This creates a periodic maintenance history file, sets the analysis
counter back to zero, increments the reset counter, enters the reset
date, and enters any comments.
644
1.
From the Maintenance menu, click Login. The Maintenance dialog

box will appear.
2.
Click the check box before the item that periodic maintenance
was performed on.
3.
Click on the Comments box and enter any maintenance

comments.
4.
Click OK.
CHN628
Maintenance
View Log File

The log file is a history of past events. Every time one of the following
procedures is performed, it will be recorded in the log file.
Maintenance
Change of Mass by Operator
Data Out of Range (Ambient Monitor parameter values)
Date of last calibration, drift or blank
Date scheduled maintenance is performed
Network Errors
Network Sign-on Errors
Sample Aborted
Sample Deleted
Standard check out-of-range
1.
From the Maintenance menu, click View Log Files. The Log File
window will appear.
2.
Click Print to receive a printout of the log file on the system

printer.
3.
CHN628
645
Configure Maintenance Counters

Maintenance Counters is a list of components and assemblies, within
the instrument, that have been determined to require periodic
maintenance. An analysis counter will determine when periodic
maintenance is needed and alert the operator. After maintenance, a
history log of maintenance performed is automatically generated. For
information concerning periodic maintenance and procedures, refer to
the Periodic Maintenance Schedule, page 64. The counters should not
be reset from this procedure. To reset the counters, refer to Reset
Maintenance Counters, page 648.
646
1.
From the Configuration menu, click Counters. The Counters dialog

box will appear.
2.
Click Add to define a maintenance counter.
3.

Maintenance Counter Definitions, page 647, for additional
information.
4.
To remove a counter select it and click Delete. Only counters

added by the operator can be removed.
5.
To arrange the counter in ascending alphabetical order click

Ascending.
6.
To arrange the counter in descending alphabetical order click

Descending.
7.
To move a counter up towards the top of the screen select the

counter and click Promote.
8.
To move a counter down towards the bottom of the screen select

the counter and click Demote.
9.
Click OK.
CHN628
Maintenance
Maintenance Counter Definitions

NameA name or description of the component or assembly that
requires periodic maintenance.
Count BlanksIf Yes is entered and a blank is analyzed, the analyses
counter will increment. If No is entered and a blank is analyzed, the
analyses counter will remain at the same value.
StopThe determined number of analyses that the analyses counter
can reach before the instrument will automatically stop and prevent
continued analysis. To turn this function off, enter 0.
WarningThe determined number of analyses that the analyses
counter can reach before a warning message is displayed alerting the
operator that periodic maintenance is necessary. Analysis will not stop
when this counter limit is reached. To turn this function off, enter 0.
AnalysesThe total number of samples analyzed.
ResetsThe number of times that the maintenance item was serviced.
The resets counter is incremented every time a maintenance item is
checked in the Maintenance dialog box.
ResetDisplays the date and time the maintenance counter was reset.
CommentsA place for the operator to add notes or comments
concerning maintenance.
Maintenance
CHN628
647
Reset Maintenance Counters

Reset Maintenance Counters is used to reset the counters back to
zero. After maintenance, a history log of maintenance performed is
automatically generated. This information is used create that history
log file.
1.
From the Maintenance menu, click Login. The Maintenance dialog

box will appear.
2.
Select the item(s) that maintenance has been performed on.
3.
Click OK.
4.
A Confirmation dialog box associated with every counter will

appear.
5.
6.
648
A.
Click Yes if maintenance was performed.
B.
Click No if maintenance was not performed.
C.
Click Cancel to exit procedure.
The Confirm dialog box for the second maintenance item will
appear.
A.
Click Yes if maintenance was performed.
B.
Click No if maintenance was not performed.
C.
Click Cancel to exit procedure.
Continue until all maintenance items were displayed in the

Confirm dialog boxes and answer Yes, No or Cancel to the
procedure.
CHN628
Maintenance
Theory of Operation
The Theory of Operation chapter provides an overview of how the
instrument operates and the stages of operation that generate reliable
results.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 72
Theory of Operation CHN628 .......................................................... 73
Method of Standard Additions ......................................................... 76
Calculations .................................................................................. 78
Barometric Pressure ...................................................................... 79
Example .................................................................................. 79
Thermal Conductivity Cell ............................................................. 710
Infrared Radiation Cell ................................................................. 712
Theory of Calibration ................................................................... 713
Calibration Definitions ............................................................. 715
Blank Analysis ....................................................................... 717
Standard Analysis .................................................................. 717
Comparator Level ........................................................................ 720
Theory of Operation
CHN628
71
Illustrations
Figure 7-1 CHN628 Measurement Flow Diagram .................................74
Figure 7-2 Pneumatic Flow Diagram .................................................75
Figure 7-3 Thermal Conductivity of Gases .........................................711
72
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Theory of Operation CHN628

As you read this section refer to the Measurement Flow Diagram on
page 74.
The CHN628 Series Elemental Determinator is used to determine
nitrogen, carbon/nitrogen, and carbon/hydrogen/nitrogen in organic
matrices. The instrument utilizes a combustion technique and provides
a result within 4.5 minutes for all the elements being determined. The
instrument features custom Windows -based software operated
through an external PC to control the system operation and data
management.
A pre-weighed and encapsulated sample is placed in the instrument's
loader where the sample will be transferred to the instrument's purge
chamber directly above the furnace, eliminating the atmospheric gases
from the transfer process. The sample is then introduced to the
primary furnace containing only pure oxygen, resulting in a rapid and
complete combustion (oxidation) of the sample. Carbon, hydrogen,
and nitrogen present in the sample are oxidized to carbon dioxide
(CO2), water (H20), and NOx respectively, and are swept by the
oxygen carrier through a secondary furnace for further oxidation and
particulate removal. In the FP and CN628 models, the combustion
gases pass through a pre-cooler and thermoelectric cooler to remove
the water vapor. The combination gases are then collected in a vessel
known as a ballast for equilibration. The homogenized gases from the
ballast are swept through a 10 cc aliquot loop and then passed into a
helium carrier gas. Separate optimized non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
cells are utilized for the detection of H2O and CO2 ensuring the rapid
analysis time of the system. The NOx gases are passed through a
reduction tube filled with copper to reduce the gases to N and remove
any excess oxygen present from the combustion process. The aliquot
gas then passes through Lecosorb and Anhydrone to remove CO2 and
the water generated during the CO2 trapping process and onto a
thermal conductivity cell (TC) utilized to detect the N2 .
The final results are typically displayed in weight percent or parts-permillion but can be displayed in other custom units or conversions such
as percent total protein, moisture corrected, and others.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
73
Figure 7-1
CHN628 Measurement Flow Diagram
74
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Figure 7-2
Pneumatic Flow Diagram
Theory of Operation
CHN628
75
Method of Standard Additions

The method of standard additions is a common method for
determining analyte concentrations in complex matrices such as soils,
biological fluids, etc. Matrix interferences and background for many
such samples may result in interferences with analyte signal that
cause inaccurate determination of analyte concentration. The
background may be determined by adding analyte to the sample and
measuring the instrumental response. The difference between sample
and spiked sample is assumed to be due only to change in analyte
concentrations.
A simple procure is generally used in which the sample is spiked at
several increasing concentrations of analyte. The samples are
analyzed and the response plotted with the standard added plotted on
the x-axis and instrumental response on the y-axis. The slope (a) and
y-intercept (b) are determined through linear regression analysis of
the calibration curve.
S = aMs + b
where:
(1)
S = instrumental response (signal)

Ms = volume of standard
76
CHN628
Theory of Operation
The mass of standard Ms(0) from that point to the first solution on the
curve (x = 0) contains the same amount of analyte as the sample. So,
Mxcx = [Ms(0)]cS
where:
(2)
Mx = mass of the sample aliquot

cx = concentration of the sample
cs = concentration of the sample
Combing equations 1 and 2 and solving for cx:

cx = (bcs/aMx)
The analyte concentration can then be calculated from the slope and
intercept of the standard addition calibration curve.
As an example, this technique can be used to determine the unknown
concentration of the nitrogen content in aqueous standards.
In the following calibration screen example, linear was selected and
the standard additions offset appears on the calibration screen at the
left.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
77
Calculations
The following is a list of calculations used by the software to determine
the final analysis result.
Adjusted MassMass * ( 1 - Sample Moisture / 100 ) * ( 1 / ( 1 Moisture Basis / 100 ) )
Adjusted Area((area * (Correction Factor) - blank) * drift *
Sensitivity Factor.
Nitrogen mgAdjusted area passed through the calibration curve.
Nitrogen ppmNitrogen % * 10,000.
Nitrogen %Nitrogen mg / adjusted mass.
Drift FactorCalculates a factor that returns the drift standard to the
same calculated value that was determined during the calibration
process.
78
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Barometric Pressure
Barometric pressure, which directly affects gas volume, is sensed by a
pressure transducer. The barometric pressure transducer constantly
monitors the pressure and feeds this information to the software. The
software uses this information to compensate analysis results. During
initial setup, the barometric pressure transducer is calibrated by
entering the current actual barometric pressure.
Pressure is often reported in inches of mercury (Hg) which must be
converted to millimeters (mm) of mercury. To convert from inches of
Hg to mm of Hg, multiply the barometric pressure by 25.4.
Pressure varies inversely with altitude and, if pressure readings are
measured and reported from an altitude other than operation,
adjustments should be made accordingly. The following table
illustrates that as altitude increases, pressure decreases.
Altitude
Pressure (mmHg)
760
250
753
500
746
750
740
1,000
733
2,000
707
3,000
681
4,000
656
5,000
632
6,000
609
7,000
586
8,000
564
9,000
543
10,000
523
Example
Barometric pressure is reported at 750 mmHg at sea level (0 feet) but
operation altitude is 1000 feet. Adjust the reported sea level pressure
to operation level pressure by using the formula:
733 mmHg
750 mmHg
723 mmHg
760 mmHg
In this example, the barometric pressure to be entered into the
instrument is 723 mmHg.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
79
Thermal Conductivity Cell

The thermal conductivity cell has the ability to detect differences in the
thermal conductivity of gases (see below). This TC cell is operated in a
nitrogen optimized mode. The cell consists of two pair of matched
filaments used in four legs of a Wheatstone bridge. The "reference"
filaments are maintained in a constant gas and gas flow environment
while the "measure" filaments are maintained in a constant gas flow
environment, but the gas composition is allowed to vary. All filaments
are mounted in an insulated metal block. A Filament Current Factor is
calculated by the software to compensate for changes in the filament
current due to TC cell temperature changes.
The Wheatstone Bridge is balanced with a specified bridge current
while both filaments are essentially in identical environments.
The bridge current causes self-heating of the filaments. The
temperature of the filaments is always much higher than the oven
temperature in which the cell is located.
As long as both filaments remain in the same environment under
which the bridge was balanced, the bridge output will remain at
approximately 0.3 volts. Any disturbance of this environment will
result in a change in bridge output. The bridge output is AC coupled to
amplifiers that have an output offset.
Once the bridge is balanced and stabilized under proper conditions, the
only variations in bridge output are due to variations in the type and
quantity of gas present at the "measure" filaments. The bridge is
balanced with Helium (He) flowing in the measure chamber and
reference chamber. The introduction of nitrogen causes the
temperature of the measure filaments to increase since nitrogen has a
lower thermal conductivity than helium. In this instance, the bridge
becomes unbalanced and an output becomes available to the preamp,
resulting in a positive reading. The amount of nitrogen determines the
magnitude of the readings. The sensitivity of the system is governed
by bridge current and the difference in thermal conductivity between
the analyze gas, nitrogen, and the carrier gas, helium.
710
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Gas
Symbol
MolecularWeight
ThermalConductivity
Hydrogen
H2
39
Helium
He
33
Neon
Ne
20
10.4
Oxygen
O2
32
5.7
Nitrogen
N2
28
5.6
Air (dry)
Air
29
5.4
Carbon Monoxide
CO
28
5.4
Water Vapor
H2O
18
4.0
Ar
40
3.8
Carbon Dioxide
CO2
44
3.3
Sulfur Dioxide
SO2
64
1.6
Argon
Figure 7-3
Thermal Conductivity of Gases
Theory of Operation
CHN628
711
Infrared Radiation Cell

The descriptions that follow refer to CO2 optimized detector. The
analysis of hydrogen is identical with only the necessary change to
accommodate a different gas (H2O).
The infrared source (IR) consists of nichrome wire, which is resistanceheated to 850oC. The IR source radiates visible energy as well as all
wavelengths in the infrared spectrum.
Carbon dioxide absorbs IR energy at a precise wavelength within the
IR spectrum. Energy from the IR source is absorbed as the gas passes
through the cell, preventing it from reaching the IR detector. All other
IR energy is prevented from reaching the IR detector by a narrow
band-pass filter. Because of the wavelength filter, the absorption of IR
energy can be attributed only to carbon dioxide (CO2). The
concentration of CO2 is detected as a level of energy at the detector.
One IR Cell is used as both a reference and for measurement. The
total carbon, as carbon dioxide, is detected on a continuous and
simultaneous basis. The cell consists of an IR source, a narrow bandpass filter, a condensing cone, an IR energy detector, and the cell
body. Radiated energy enters the cell body through a window, travels
through the cell body, then exits through a second window and a
precise wavelength filter. The selective filter passes only the CO2
absorption wavelength into a condensing cone that concentrates the
energy at the detector. The solid state detector is AC coupled to a
preamplifier. As the gas concentration increases, the voltage to the
preamp decreases.
The starting reference level, or baseline, for the detector is
established by running 100% oxygen through the cell. The pure
oxygen environment permits the maximum amount of energy to reach
the detector. This maximum energy level is AC coupled to the preamp
where it is amplified, rectified and filtered. It is then sent to an analogto-digital (A/D) converter where it is converted to a digital signal.
As analysis begins, the cell output decreases with the amount of
carbon (as CO2) present in the cell. The computer reads the cell output
and produces data points that are stored in memory. The computer
then processes the curve, or graph, formed by these data points and
after calibration forms a linear curve. The calibration curve is then
used by the computer to accurately calculate the sample result.
712
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Theory of Calibration
Calibration compensates for differences between the total element
measured and the actual element concentration. A programmed
equation will correlate the response between the observed and
theoretical measurement of analyte, permitting accurate
measurements to be made.
The Windows software provides several types of calibration curves.
The calibration curves include single standard calibration, linear,
quadratic, and cubic. First perform a blank calibration, then once a
standard calibration has been defined re-calibration is not necessary
unless a cell or flow has been changed. The daily routine will consist of
determining the blank and performing a drift correction.
The first step to be performed is the determination of a method
specific blank.
Several blanks should be analyzed. The linearization table is applied to
the peak during the analysis. The area under the peak is calculated
and stored as a raw area (Ar).
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
1 9 17 25 33
1 10 19 28 37
1 10 19 28 37
1 10 19 28 37
Time
Raw Area = 19
Time
Raw Area = 18
Time
Raw Area = 19
Time
Raw Area = 18
If the four blanks displayed above were selected in the software to

calculate a blank, the result would be that the average of the four
would be stored as the blank area (Ab).
Ab
19+18+19+18
18.5
4
The blank area, Ab will be subtracted from every sample analyzed
after it is set.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
713
After the blank is defined, a calibration curve needs to be defined.

Several standards need to be selected that will cover the operating
range of analyte concentration for the samples of unknown analyte
concentration. At least three replicates of each standard should be
analyzed. Care must be taken to accurately compensate for trapped
atmosphere, atmospheric blank, with each analyzed standard. If the
calibration curve is constructed using more than one sample type, the
atmospheric blank must be determined for each standard. This can be
accomplished by analyzing the same sample mass encapsulated and in
an open container, dissolving in water, or palletizing the sample. The
difference in the results is the atmospheric blank.
120
60
0
120
60
0
120
60
0
1 11 21 31 41 51
1 11 21 31 41 51
1 11 21 31 41 51
Time
Time
Time
The area under the peak is calculated and stored as a raw area, Ar.
The current blank area, Ab, is subtracted from the raw area, Ar, of the
standard to yield the Area, A.
A = Ar - Ab
The area A, is adjusted for instrument drift by multiplying by the drift
factor. Each time a calibration is performed the drift factor is reset to
1.0. The units of the area, A, are then adjusted to reflect absolute
amount of analyte by multiplying by the sensitivity factor.
Aadj = A * Sensitivity Factor * Drift Factor
The resultant adjusted area, Aadj, of the standards are plotted against
the known grams Analyte * 100 of the analyzed standards. The bestfit line, linear, quadratic, or cubic, is determined and taken as the
calibration curve for the method. The default calibration curve has a
slope of 1.0 and travels through the origin.
Linear
(example)
Linear fixed-at-origin
(example)
250
200
150
100
50
y = 0.9838x + 1.3582
grams Analyte * 100
grams Analyte * 100
250
200
150
100
50
0
50
100
150
200
250
Adjuste d Are a
714
y = 0.9926x
50
100
150
200
250
Adjuste d Are a
CHN628
Theory of Operation
In general, the line that is to be selected is the line that yields the
lowest RMS error. However, if none of the calibration standards are
very low in analyte concentration, then linear fixed-at-origin should be
selected. This should only be done if the samples of unknown analyte
concentration do not fall in the range of very low analyte
concentration.
If, however, the samples of unknown concentration mostly fall into the
very low analyte concentration range, the 1/certified weighting should
be selected. This type of weighting helps off set a natural bias to
higher concentration standards during the least squares fitting
process.
Aadj is now taken through the calibration curve to yield grams analyte
* 100.
grams Analyte * 100 = Adjusted Area * Slope + Intercept
This is then generally converted to a percentage to be reported. The
calculation is performed by dividing the grams analyte * 100 by the
mass of the sample in grams.
% Analyte
grams Analyte * 100
Atmospheric Blank
Sample Mass
The instrument is now ready to give accurate results over the
calibrated range for each calibrated cell.
There is a bit of daily maintenance that must be performed to ensure
instrument accuracy. At least once per day, preferably at least once
every four hours, or in the event of a method change, the blank must
be verified. If it is different than the pre-defined blank, it must be
reset.
Calibration Definitions
1/Certified WeightingA weighting that can be applied to the
calibration data points that will counteract a bias for higher
concentrations that comes naturally out of the curve fitting routines.
Adjusted Area (Aadj)Adjusted Area = Area (A) times Correction
Factor times Sensitivity Factor times Drift Factor. Area (A) equals Raw
Area (Ar) minus Blank Area (Ab).
AnalyteThe substance whose physical or chemical properties are
measured and correlated, directly or indirectly, to the desired
information.
Atmospheric BlankIn every encapsulated sample there are both
sample material and air (atmosphere). The amount of air trapped with
the sample, atmospheric blank, is dependant upon the volume of
sample (sample mass) and the physical state of the sample (pellet,
liquid, powder, crystal, grain, etc.). After the combustion of the sample
the nitrogen from sample and atmosphere are presented to the
detector and mass.
BlankThe signal obtained during an analysis that cannot be
attributed to the sample. The blank is due primarily to Argon
impurities in the oxygen. The blank should be determined before
calibration or drift correction.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
715
Blank Area (Ab)The area under the peak obtained when analyzing
blank analyses. Each method shall require a defined blank or it will be
defaulted to zero.
BlankThe signal obtained during an analysis that cannot be
attributed to the sample. The blank is due primarily to Argon
impurities in the oxygen. The blank should be determined before
calibration or drift correction.
Calibration CurveA series of standard samples containing known
concentrations of the analyte are analyzed. These standards should
cover the range of interest and have a matrix composition as similar to
the samples as possible. A blank sample must be analyzed and
subtracted from each of the standard samples. The Adjusted Area Aadj
is plotted along the X-axis versus the known concentration along the
Y-axis for each of the analyzed standard samples. The curve that best
fits the plotted points is the calibration curve.
Calibration FactorThe slope of the obtained calibration curve.
Drift CorrectionThe process of determining the drift factor.
RMS Error(Root Mean Square Error) A method of quantifying
dispersion or spread of data. It is used in the Windows software to
determine which calibration curve is better. The lower the RMS error
the better.
Drift FactorA factor that is applied to the signal of an analyzed
defined standard to adjust it to the expected signal; based on
information extrapolated from the calibration curve. It is then used to
adjust analyte signals to correct for instrument drift.
Linearization TableA table containing peak heights and slopes. The
purpose is to make minor adjustments to the signal to compensate for
minor non-linearities in the IR cells.
OriginThe intersection of the X and Y axes. On the calibration curve
this is zero concentration and zero signal.
MassThe quantity of matter in an object. In the Windows software
mass is the equivalent of weight in the keypad software. Default Unit:
gram.
PeakWhen the analyte passes through the TC cell there is a change
in the voltage of the detector that is proportional to the amount of
analyte in the cell. After the analyte is passed the IR cell detector
voltage returns to normal. The region of this voltage change is the
peak.
20
10
0
0
50
100
RMS Error(Root Mean Square Error) A method of quantifying

dispersion or spread of data. It is used in the Windows software to
determine which calibration curve is better. The lower the RMS error
the better.
SampleA determined mass of a substance of unknown analyte
concentration. The analyte concentration will be determined by
performing the analysis.
716
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Sensitivity FactorA multiplicative factor applied to the adjusted area

(Aadj) for the purpose of adjusting the units and to give a calibration
factor near 1.0.
StandardA sample whose analyte concentration is accurately known.
Blank Analysis
Several blanks should be analyzed. The linearization table is applied to
the peak during the analysis. The area under the peak is calculated
and stored as a raw area (Ar).
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
0
1 9 17 25 33
1 10 19 28 37
1 10 19 28 37
1 10 19 28 37
Time
Raw Area = 19
Time
Raw Area = 18
Time
Raw Area = 19
Time
Raw Area = 18
If the four blanks displayed above were selected in the software to

calculate a blank, the result would be that the average of the four
would be stored as the blank area (Ab).
Ab
19+18+19+18
18.5
4
The results for analyzed blanks will be calculated in the same manner
as all other analyses. The result is displayed in percent. The blank is
stored as an area. However, to avoid confusion, the blank that is listed
on the print out and on the display is in percent. The concentration
displayed is based on a 1 gram samples mass and the current
calibration factor.
The blank area, Ab will be subtracted from every sample analyzed
after it is set.
Standard Analysis
After the blank is defined, a calibration needs to be performed. At least
three replicates of the same standard need to be analyzed in the same
fashion as the blanks. The standard needs to be selected such that the
analyte concentration is in the middle of the operating range. The
linearization table is applied to the peak during the analysis.
120
60
0
120
60
0
1 11 21 31 41 51
Time
120
60
0
1 11 21 31 41 51
Time
1 11 21 31 41 51
Time
The area under the peak is calculated and stored as a raw area, Ar.
The current blank area, Ab, is subtracted from the raw area, Ar, of the
standard to yield the Area, A.
A = Ar - Ab
Theory of Operation
CHN628
717
The units of the area, A, are then adjusted to reflect absolute amount
of analyte by multiplying by the sensitivity factor (different for each IR
cell) and the calibration factor (1.0 is the default value).
grams Analyte * 100 = A * Sensitivity Factor * Calibration Factor
The result is displayed generally as a percentage. This is calculated by
dividing the absolute amount of analyte, A2, by the mass of the
sample in grams and subtracting the atmospheric blank.
% Analyte
grams Analyte * 100
Atmospheric Blank
Sample Mass
The calibration factor is determined by comparing the % Analyte
obtained by the analysis and the known % Analyte of the standard. A
standard should be selected that has a known analyte concentration in
the middle of the operating analyte concentration range. A ratio is
taken of the known and observed analyte concentration. The resultant
ratio is taken as the calibration factor. The calibration is then a line
drawn from the origin having a slope equal to calibration factor.
Calibration Factor
known % Analyte in Standard

Average % Analyte in Standard obtained
by Analysis
10
grams Analyte * 100
8
6
4
2
0
0
10
Are a * Se nsitivity Factor

Slope = 1
Now, samples of unknown analyte concentration may be analyzed. The

process and order of events are the same as described before.
The calibration should be adjusted when there is a substantial change
in operating analyte concentration or if a standard fails to yield the
known analyte concentration. Also, the blank must be performed
before calibration and needs to be redefined anytime there is a
change in method of analysis. Calibration and blank must be defined
for each element analyzed or each cell used in the analysis.
718
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Drift Factor
The drift factor is determined by comparing the calculated

concentration from the original calibration curve to the calculated
concentration from the drift point. The resultant ratio is called the Drift
Factor:
Drift Factor = Calculated Concentration from Calibration Curve
Calculated Concentration from Drift Point
The drift factor uses the calculated concentration from the calibration
curve and not the certified value.
The drift factor is then multiplied with the measured concentration to
make minor corrections to the accuracy of results. The resulting value
is the drift-corrected concentration. This method compensates for
changes that cannot be attributed to blank or method changes.
Theory of Operation
CHN628
719
Comparator Level
An analysis that lasts excessively long causes an unnecessary delay
while an analysis that isn't long enough can cause loss of significant
data collection. Since not all samples melt in the same way, analyses
should not be performed based on time alone.
The length of each analysis is determined on an individual basis by the
time-out and comparator level. An analysis ends when the time limit is
reached and the A/D output of the detector, after passing its peak, is
equal to the comparator level. This comparator level is a constant of
five plus a percent of the peak:
Method Comparator Level = 5 + (X)(P).
Where P = detector A/D output peak and X = selected comparator
level percentage.
During an analysis, the output of the detector, in the form of digital
data, is collected and summed to arrive at the analysis result. If this
data were plotted, it would reflect the "curve" of the detector output.
Shown below are two examples of the same detector output "curve"
(buffer plot). The first example shows the amount of detector output
collected during an analysis with a comparator level setting at 25%
while the second example illustrates this at 6%.
End of Analysis where "X" equals 25.0%
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
START OF
ANALYSIS
COMPARATOR
LEVELEND OF ANALYSIS
DETECTOR OUTPUT
COLLECTED
End of Analysis where "X" equals 6%

DETECTOR
OUTPUT
START OF
ANALYSIS
COMPARATOR
LEVELEND OF ANALYSIS
DETECTOR OUTPUT
COLLECTED
720
CHN628
Theory of Operation
The following conclusions can be drawn from the examples:
A high comparator level shortens analysis time.
A low comparator level includes more sample gas, and

therefore, more analyte, into answer calculations.
A comparator level that is too low, however, results in the

inclusion of very low concentrations, which don't significantly
affect the result (noise), but lengthen the analysis.
A comparator level of one percent usually provides optimum

performance by allowing the collection of all significant output within a
reasonable time.
Extremely low output peaks may need a larger comparator level to
exclude insignificant output levels produced toward the end of analysis
and to cut down on drift. The minimum time should be extended to
match what would be considered a reasonable time length for the
analysis of such samples. The combination of a high comparator level
setting and an extended minimum analysis time insures that all
significant output is collected and analysis time lengths are consistent
without being extensive.
Whenever the comparator level changes check the system calibration
since interaction can occur.
COMPARATOR LEVEL
(SET TOO HIGH)
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
COLLECTED
SIGNIFICANT
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
EXCLUDED
COMPARATOR LEVEL
(SET TOO LOW)
INSIGNIFICANT
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
COLLECTED
Theory of Operation
CHN628
721
722
CHN628
Theory of Operation
Diagnostics
Illustrations .................................................................................. 82
Ambient Monitor ........................................................................... 83
Ambient Chart ......................................................................... 83
Ambient Monitor Definitions .................................................. 84
Ambient Monitor Ranges ...................................................... 86
Calibrations .................................................................................. 87
Set (Barometric) Pressure ......................................................... 87
Ballast Target Pressure ............................................................. 88
Set Bridge ............................................................................... 88
Backup (Hardware) Calibration .................................................. 88
Backup Calibration Values ......................................................... 89
Restore Calibration Values ....................................................... 810
Network Diagnostics .................................................................... 811
Poll Devices ........................................................................... 812
Reset Network ....................................................................... 812
Upgrade a Device ................................................................... 812
Network Definitions ........................................................... 812
Furnace Diagnostics..................................................................... 813
Furnace Temperature Control .................................................. 814
Combustion Furnace and Afterburner Temperature Control ..... 814
Reduction Tube Temperature Control ................................... 814
IR Line Temperature Control ............................................... 815
Ballast Oven Temperature Control ....................................... 815
Furnace Diagnostics Definitions ........................................... 815
Leak Check ................................................................................. 816
How to Perform a Leak Check .................................................. 816
Leak Check Definitions ....................................................... 818
Leak Check Legend Symbols ............................................... 819
Leak Check Flow Diagrams ...................................................... 820
System Check ............................................................................. 829
System Check Definitions ........................................................ 830
Solenoids and Switches ................................................................ 831
Diagnostics
CHN628
81
Illustrations
Figure 8-1 Analytical Function Diagram .............................................820
Figure 8-2 Oxygen Leak Check Flow Diagram ....................................821
Figure 8-3 Helium Leak Check Flow Diagram .....................................822
Figure 8-4 Oxygen Leak Check (Combustion) Diagram ........................823
Figure 8-5 Oxygen Leak Check (Ballast) Diagram ...............................824
Figure 8-6 Oxygen Leak Check (Doser Aliquot) Flow Diagram ..............825
Figure 8-7 Helium Doser Leak Check ................................................826
Figure 8-8 Helium Bypass Doser Leak Check......................................827
Figure 8-9 Linear Function Diagram ..................................................828
82
CHN628
Diagnostics
Ambient Monitor
The Ambient Monitor permits the service technician or operator to
monitor instrument parameters and determine their status. Ambient
Chart provides system parameters on a chart and graph. The selected
parameters are not selectable by the operator; they were selected by
LECO as being the most critical to monitor.
Refer to Ambient Monitor Definitions, page 84, for information
concerning the parameters and values displayed on the Ambient Chart
screen.
If the instrument has just been turned on, it will take a period of time
for the system to stabilize.
Ambient Chart
Diagnostics
1.
Click Diagnostics and select Chart to display the Ambient Monitor

Chart screen.
2.
Check that all system parameter values fall within the Ambient
Monitor Ranges shown on page 86. If any values are out of
range, refer to the corresponding topic for additional information.
CHN628
83
3.
Click the Check Box, to the left of the desired parameter, to

display the parameter value in the graph above the chart. More
than one parameter can be displayed by holding down the Control
Key and clicking the Parameter Check Box. A yellow circle with an
exclamation mark inside, to the left of the check box, indicates
the parameter value is outside the desired range.
4.
Click the right mouse button, with the mouse pointer inside the
graph, to reset, restore, zoom in, zoom out, and set the graph
range. The parameter value is displayed on the vertical axis and
the time is displayed on the horizontal axis. The box in the lower
left corner of the graph displays the hours since the instrument
was turned on or the graph reset. The hours reset to 0 after 24.
5.
Click Reset Chart to reset the parameter values and time on the
chart and graph.
6.
Click Print to print the parameter values on the system printer.
Ambient Monitor Definitions

CO2 CellThe IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell
should have an output greater than 1.5 volts. There is no mechanical
adjustment for output voltage. The output voltage is set by software.
H20 CellThe IR Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating cell
should have an output greater than 1.5 volts. There is no mechanical
adjustment for output voltage. The output voltage is set by software.
Nitrogen CellThe TC Cell output voltage in volts. A properly operating
cell should have an output greater than 0.0 volts. There is no
mechanical adjustment for output voltage. The output voltage is set by
software.
Bridge VoltsThe output voltage of the TC cell bridge in volts. The
bridge is a measurement device in the TC cell that develops an output
signal based on the analyte concentration.
TC Block TemperatureThe temperature of the heated TC cell.
Helium PressureThe pressure of helium on the reference flow.
Ballast PressureThe temperature of the ballast oven compartment.
This temperature should be at 50oC.
Piston Return PressureThe pressure of pneumatic gas at the top of
the ballast.
Pneumatic Incoming PressureDepending on the valve state, the
pressure of the incoming pneumatic gas, the regulated pneumatic
pressure and the ballast piston backpressure are measured by this
parameter. The pneumatic incoming pressure should measure
approximately 40 psi. The regulated pneumatic pressure should
measure 0 to 40 psi depending when the measurement is taken. The
ballast piston backpressure should measure 12 psi.
Combustion PressureThe pressure of the combustion gas as it enters
the furnace. The values measured by pressure transducers P2.
84
CHN628
Diagnostics
Combustion Furnace TemperatureThe temperature of the

combustion furnace. Range: Ambient to 1100oC. This temperature is
measured by a thermocouple in the furnace.
Afterburner TemperatureThe temperature of the afterburner or
secondary side of the combustion furnace. Nominally this temperature
should be set to 850oC. Range: Ambient to 1050oC. This temperature
is measured by a thermocouple in the afterburner or secondary
furnace.
Cabinet TemperatureThe ambient temperature inside the instrument
as measured by a temperature transducer. This value is in degrees
centigrade. Before analysis the ambient temperature should be
approximately 25oC or the ambient room temperature.
TE Cooler TemperatureThe internal temperature of the
Thermoelectric Cooler. Nominal Temperature: 5oC.
Oven TemperatureThe temperature of the IR and TC cell oven
compartment. This temperature should be at 47oC.
Ballast TemperatureTemperature of the Ballast Tube. This
temperature should be at 50oC.
Reduction (Catalyst) Tube TemperatureThe temperature of the
Catalyst Heater. This temperature is measured by a thermocouple in
the catalyst heater and not adjustable by the operator. The
temperature of the catalyst heater is 700oC
Ballast Oven TemperatureThe temperature of the ballast oven
compartment. This temperature should be at 50oC.
IR Line TemperatureThe heated line temperature of the transfer lines
between the IR cells.
Diagnostics
CHN628
85
Ambient Monitor Ranges

This symbol will appear next to the parameter name, on the ambient
monitor screen, if the parameter value is out of minimum or maximum
range.
The instrument must be on for a least 2 hours and the oxygen flow
set to low before checking the following parameter values.
Parameter
86
Minimum
Maximum
CO2 Cell
1.5 volts
4.8 volts
H2O Cell
1.5 volts
4.8 volts
Nitrogen
0.0 volts
1.5 volts
Bridge Volts
5.0 volts
11 volts
Ballast Pressure
720 mmHg
1300 mmHg
Combustion Flow
0 lpm
6 lpm
Pneumatic Incoming Pressure
0 psi
42 psi
Combustion Pressure
0 psi
20 psi
Combustion Furnace
Temperature
900oC
1050oC
Afterburner Temperature
Ambient
1050oC
Cabinet Temperature
Ambient
50oC
TE Cooler Temperature
2oC
10oC
Oven Temperature
45oC
55oC
Ballast Temperature
45oC
55oC
Reduction Tube Temperature
690oC
710oC
Ballast Oven Temperature
45oC
55oC
Helium Pressure
11.8 psi
13 psi
TC Cell Temperature
57.1C
57.5C
CHN628
Diagnostics
Calibrations
Calibrations permit the service technician or operator to set the
barometric pressure, combustion flow calibration, select the ballast
size and perform a backup calibration using the calibration disk
supplied with the instrument.
Set (Barometric) Pressure

Set Pressure permits the service technician or operator to calibrate the
barometric transducer located in the instrument.
Calibration is necessary for proper analysis results and varies with the
location of the instrument. This procedure must be done when the
instrument is installed at location. For more information about
barometric pressure refer to the Barometric Pressure on page 79.
Diagnostics
1.
Determine the current barometric pressure at the location of the

instrument. This can be done with an external barometer or via
the Internet.
2.
Click Diagnostics and select Calibration. The Hardware Calibration

screen will appear.
3.
Enter the Barometric Pressure from the external barometer in the

edit box to the left of Set Pressure in the TC Cell Box.
4.
Click Set Pressure to set the pressure entered in the edit box.
5.
Click Close to exit this procedure and save the setting.
CHN628
87
Ballast Target Pressure

This procedure ensures proper ballast pressure based on the altitude
of the instrument. This procedure should be performed during
installation.
1.
Enter the altitude of the instruments location. The altitude can be

entered in meters or feet.
2.
Click Set Target to automatically calculate the Target Pressure

(mmHg) for the ballast.
Set Bridge
Set Bridge sets the gain of the TC Cell.
The TC Cell gain has been set during the manufacturing process. It is
not necessary to reset the gain unless it has been serviced or
replaced.
1.
Click Auto Set Bridge to automatically set the gain of the TC Cell.
The gain factor will appear in the edit box to the left of the set
bridge button.
2.
To manually set the gain, enter the gain factor in the edit box and
click Set Bridge. The gain factor must be between 0 and 255. This
can be used for troubleshooting or servicing the instrument.
Backup (Hardware) Calibration

Backup Calibration permits the operator to save hardware calibration
parameter values in a designated file on the system hard drive. This
file can be accessed at a later time to restore hardware calibration
values that may have been lost or changed. It is not necessary to
backup the calibration values to save them; the instrument will
automatically save them in a system file. It is necessary to save them
in a backup file if you think you'll ever need to restore them to earlier
defined hardware calibration values.
Backup Calibration saves the following parameter values:
Barometric Pressure Calibration
Combustion Flow Calibration
TC Bridge Value
Furnace Calibrations
IR Cell Reference and Saturation Values
Perform this procedure if you feel it will be necessary to restore

calibration values that were lost.
It is not necessary to perform this procedure to save the calibration
values. The instrument automatically does this in a system file.
88
CHN628
Diagnostics
Backup Calibration Values
Diagnostics
1.

screen will appear.
2.
Click Backup to create a backup file of the hardware calibration

parameter values. The file save as dialog box will appear.
3.
Enter the file name and folder location in the dialog box.
4.
Click Save to save the backup file.
CHN628
89
Restore Calibration Values
810
1.

screen will appear.
2.
Click Restore to load the hardware calibration values that have

been saved in a backup file. The file open dialog box will appear.
3.
Select the folder and backup file from the dialog box.
4.
Click Open to load the calibration values from the selected backup
file.
CHN628
Diagnostics
Network Diagnostics
The electronic design of the instrument is modular. It consists of a
main controller, similar to a host computer, and peripheral electronic
assemblies, which are controlled from the main controller. During
operation all peripheral assemblies communicate with the main
controller over a common electronic bus. Because of this arrangement
information can be displayed and assemblies controlled from the
network screen.
From the Network screen the type of hardware installed can be
identified, the version of firmware identified, the operational status of
the peripheral devices can be determined, the network can be reset, a
network device can be reset and the firmware can be upgraded.
The spreadsheet in the upper right area of the screen lists the device,
identification, classification, instance used, serial number, version
number of the application software, checksum of the applications
software and the version of the network software. Refer to Network
Definitions on page 812.
Diagnostics
1.
Click on the Diagnostics tab.
2.
Select Network.
3.
The Network screen will appear.
CHN628
811
Poll Devices
Click Poll Devices to send a signal over the network to determine what
is connected to the network. Network hardware should appear under
devices indicating they are functioning and signing on to the network.
Reset Network
Click Reset Network to restart the network software. If something or
some operation causes an error this may correct it.
Upgrade a Device
1.
To upgrade a device with a new version of application firmware,

click the Device to upgrade. Then click Download to download the
new firmware.
2.
Click Reset Board to restart firmware application program on the

circuit board.
Network Definitions
DeviceThe name of the electronic assembly connected to the
network. Example: TC Cell.
MAC-idThe network ID number assigned to the electronic assembly
connected to the network. This number is assigned at power up and
can vary.
ClassThe type number of the electronic assembly signed on to the
network. Example: 21 is the class number assigned to the TC Cell.
InstanceA unique number assigned to an electronic assembly. If two
or more of the same type electronic assemblies are installed in the
instrument this number will be different for each assembly and is used
by the controller to differentiate one from the other.
SerialThe hardware ID number assigned to the electronic assembly.
This number is assigned during manufacturing and is unique to each
electronic assembly. The serial number is stored on the circuit board in
a PROM.
VersionThe version number of the application software located on
the electronic assembly. This software can be upgraded from the
network procedure.
ChecksumA number unique to the application software to verify if
the software was properly installed. The will be a checksum number
supplied with any software upgrades. Verify that the number
appearing in the checksum cell is the same as the number supplied
with the software upgrade.
NI VersionThe version number of the network control software
installed in the electronic assembly. This software is located in a PROM
and cannot be upgraded from the network procedure.
Hardware IDAdditional circuit board hardware identification.
FPGA VersionThe version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate
Array) software.
812
CHN628
Diagnostics
Furnace Diagnostics
The Furnace diagnostics screen is used to test the furnace and verify
proper operation. The meters on the right side of the screen can be
used to monitor Furnace Temperature.
When testing the furnace, set the temperature and observe the target
value. The furnace should ramp to the set value and remain there.
Refer to Furnace Diagnostics Definitions on page 815.
Click Diagnostics and select Furnace. The Furnace diagnostics
screen will appear.
Diagnostics
CHN628
813
Furnace Temperature Control

The Combustion Temperature and Afterburner Temperature dialog
boxes permit the operator to set the furnace temperatures for service
and Maintenance.
After exiting diagnostics any temperatures that were

changed will revert back to their previous settings.
Combustion Furnace and Afterburner Temperature Control
1.
Click the temperature edit box, or move the slider, and enter the
desired furnace temperature.
2.
Click Set New Targets to set the furnace temperature. The

furnace will increase or decrease in temperature to the set
temperature.
3.
Click Stop to disable control of the furnace temperature. The

temperature will decrease to ambient.
Reduction Tube Temperature Control

The reduction tube temperature control dialog box is used to turn the
reduction heater off or on. When control is turned on the reduction
tube temperature is automatically set to 700oC.
The reduction tube heater is also referred to as the catalyst heater.
814
1.
Click Stop to turn temperature control of the reduction tube

heater off.
2.
Click Restart to turn temperature control of the reduction tube

heater on.
CHN628
Diagnostics
IR Line Temperature Control

The IR line temperature control dialog box is used to turn the line
heater off or on. When control is turned on the line heater temperature
is automatically set to 85oC.
The IR line heater is used to heat the combustion gas as it leaves the
combustion furnace.
1.
Click Stop to turn temperature control of the line heater off.
2.
Click Restart to turn temperature control of the line heater on.
Ballast Oven Temperature Control

The ballast oven temperature control dialog box is used to turn the
ballast oven heater off or on. When control is turned on the ballast
oven temperature is automatically set to 45oC.
1.
Click Stop to turn temperature control of the ballast oven heater

off.
2.
Click Restart to turn temperature control of the ballast oven

heater on.
Furnace Diagnostics Definitions

Target ValueThe temperature that the furnace will ramp to. This can
be higher or lower than the current temperature. This value is set by
the slider and appears in the window below target value.
Ramp TargetThe current temperature of the furnace. The ramp
target temperature will change at the furnace temperature increases
or decreases.
Diagnostics
CHN628
815
Leak Check
DO NOT perform a leak check until the furnace temperature has
stabilized.
This procedure automatically checks the combustion (oxygen) and
measurement (helium) system of the instrument for a gas leak. The
entire system or a segment of the system can be checked. Performing
both tests can isolate a leak. If the system leak check fails, perform a
segmented test to determine which section of the system is leaking.
During a leak check the system is pressured above current system
furnace pressure and sealed. Its then permitted to equilibrate. For the
next 60 seconds the system pressure is measured. If the pressure
doesnt fall below 5 mm Hg of the pressurized value or rise above 2.5
mmHg of the pressurized value the leak check will pass. If the
pressure changes more the leak check fails.
If pressure has increased a solenoid valve is not operating properly or
the catalyst heater temperature has not stabilized. If pressure has
decreased gas could be leaking out of the system.
If the system leaks Leak Check Failed appears in the leak check
status bar. If the system doesnt leak Leak Check Passed appears
in the status bar.
Let the instrument warm up for at least for 30 minutes before
performing a leak check. A whole oxygen and a whole helium leak
check should be performed at the start of each day.
How to Perform a Leak Check

There are two leak checks, a whole system leak check and a
segmented system leak check. Like its name implies, the segmented
leak check isolates small sections of the system and tests them
individually. When performing a leak check, first perform a whole
system check and determine if the systems passes. If it does, STOP
there, its not necessary to continue with the segmented test. If the
whole system leak check doesnt pass, then perform a segmented test.
By isolating sections of the system you can determine which section is
leaking and concentrate your service efforts in that area.
Its possible for the whole system leak check to pass, and a segmented
leak check to fail. The whole system has a greater volume than the
isolated systems. Because of this, a small leak to the whole system
leak check looks like a large leak to an isolated segment leak check. As
long as the whole system leak check passes the instrument is
operating properly and is capable of producing excellent results.
816
CHN628
Diagnostics
Refer to Leak Check Screen Definitions and Leak Check Legend

Symbols on page 818 for additional information.
Diagnostics
1.
Click Diagnostics and select Leak Check. The Leak Check screen
will appear.
2.
Click a button in the upper left of the screen to select the leak
check procedure to perform. Only one procedure can be selected
at a time.
3.
Click Start to perform a leak check. System pressure is monitored

in the chart at the middle of the screen.
4.
Click Stop to abort a leak check in progress.
5.
Click Print to print the results of a completed leak check on the

system printer.
CHN628
817
Leak Check Definitions

Refer to the Leak Check Diagrams on page 820 to determine where
each system, listed below, is located in the instrument.
Whole OxygenClick this button to pressurize and leak check the
entire combustion system.
Whole HeliumClick this button to pressurize and leak check the
entire measurement system.
The Segmented Oxygen consists of four different sections,
Combustion, Ballast and IR Cells.
Segmented OxygenClick this button to pressurize and leak check the
combustion system. The combustion system will be leak checked in
three steps.
He Aliquot LoopClick this button to pressurize and leak check the
measurement system. The measurement system will be leak checked
in two steps.
Initial Pressure (graph)The system pressure before the leak check is
started. The system is pressurized to this value.
Overpressure (graph)Overpressure is approximately 2.5 mmHg
above initial pressure. If the pressure rises above this value the leak
check will fail.
Leak (graph)Leak pressure is approximately 5 mmHg below initial
pressure. If the pressure falls below this value the leak check will fail.
818
CHN628
Diagnostics
Leak Check Legend Symbols

Under Legend on the leak check screen are two columns of symbols.
The first column represents the measurement transducer. After the
test is complete, the color of the symbol represents test results.
The second column represents test progress. Before the test starts the
box is empty, no color. As soon as the test starts the box is filled with
a color. After the test is complete a check mark appears in the box.
Combustion Pressure Transducer symbol. After the leak check is
finished the color indicates the test result.
GreenThe leak check passed.
RedThe leak check failed. Decrease in system pressure. An X
will appear over the symbol.
YellowThe leak check failed. Increase in system pressure.
Ballast Pressure Transducer symbol. After the leak check is
finished the color indicates the test result.
GreenThe leak check passed.
RedThe leak check failed. Decrease in system pressure. An X
will appear over the symbol.
YellowThe leak check failed. Increase in system pressure.
This symbol indicates leak check progress. No color indicates leak
check is not started.
This symbol indicates leak check progress. Color indicates leak
check has started.
This symbol indicates leak check progress. A check mark indicates
leak check has finished.
Diagnostics
CHN628
819
Leak Check Flow Diagrams
Figure 8-1
Analytical Function Diagram
820
CHN628
Diagnostics
Figure 8-2
Oxygen Leak Check Flow Diagram
Diagnostics
CHN628
821
Figure 8-3
Helium Leak Check Flow Diagram
822
CHN628
Diagnostics
Figure 8-4
Oxygen Leak Check (Combustion) Diagram
Diagnostics
CHN628
823
Figure 8-5
Oxygen Leak Check (Ballast) Diagram
824
CHN628
Diagnostics
Figure 8-6
Oxygen Leak Check (Doser Aliquot) Flow Diagram
Diagnostics
CHN628
825
Figure 8-7
Helium Doser Leak Check
826
CHN628
Diagnostics
Figure 8-8
Helium Bypass Doser Leak Check
Diagnostics
CHN628
827
Figure 8-9
Linear Function Diagram
828
CHN628
Diagnostics
System Check
System check is a quick way to determine if major systems in the
instrument are operating properly. All systems should have a green
indicator beside them before the instrument is used for analysis.
The results of system check will be listed in the results column to the
right of the item checked. If any of the system checks fail, the reason
will be listed in the results column.
If a system fails system check, it will be necessary to correct the
failure before analysis. Refer to System Check Definitions on
page 830.
Diagnostics
1.
Click Diagnostics and select System Check. The System Check

screen will appear.
2.
Click Start to system check and test the systems listed on the
screen.
3.
The results of system check will be displayed to the right of the

system being checked under the results column. An X inside the
circle to the left of the system also indicates the system checked
failed.
4.
Click Print to print the results of the system check on the system
printer.
CHN628
829
System Check Definitions

Network CommunicationsCommunications between all electronic
assemblies are checked and monitored. If any device on the network
fails to communicate this system check will fail. Refer to Network
Diagnostics on page 811 for more information.
Solenoid ActiveDuring this check each solenoid valve is activated and
monitored. If any solenoid valve fails to activate system check will fail.
Refer to Solenoids and Switches on page 831 to check each solenoid
valve individually.
Solenoids OffDuring this check each solenoid valve is deactivated
and monitored. If any solenoid valve fails to deactivate system check
will fail. Refer to Solenoids and Switches on page 831 to check each
solenoid valves individually.
Pneumatic and Helium PressureChecks the incoming pneumatic and
helium pressures to determine if they have been turned on and set to
the proper value. If this check fails check the pneumatic and helium
gas tanks to determine if the gas has been turned on and the regulator
properly set. If any pressure falls outside the range listed below the
test will fail.
Pneumatic Pressure Range38 to 42 psi.
Helium Pressure Range10 to 13.1 psi.
PressureChecks the combustion, incoming oxygen and TC ballast

pressures for their proper values. If any pressure falls outside the
range listed below the test will fail.
Combustion Pressure Range0 to 2 psi.
TC Ballast Pressure Range700 to 780 mmHg.
TemperatureChecks the temperature of all heaters to determine if

theyre properly set and operating. If any temperature falls outside the
range listed below the test will fail.
TE Cooler Temperature Range2oC to 10oC.
Oven Heater Temperature Range5oC to 55oC.
Combustion Furnace, Afterburner Furnace, Reduction Heater

Temperature Range 10% of set point.
Oven Temperature Rangeset point to + 50oC.
IR and TC Cell ValuesChecks the IR and TC cell output voltages to

determine if they are in the proper range. Refer to Ambient Monitor
Definitions on page 84 for more information. If any voltage falls
outside the range listed below the test will fail.
830
IR Cell Output Voltage Range1.0 to 4.8 volts
TC Cell Output Voltage Range0.1 to 1.5 volts
CHN628
Diagnostics
Solenoids and Switches

Solenoids and Switches permit the service technician or operator to
individually activate and deactivate each of the solenoid valves. This is
a diagnostic test to determine the condition of the valve and its
operational result. As an example, the slide block can be moved to
determine its condition by toggling the Slide Block solenoid valve. To
determine what each valve may affect refer to the Measurement Flow
Diagram, on page 74.
Diagnostics
1.
Click Diagnostics and select Solenoids and Switches. The

Solenoids and Switches screen will appear.
2.
Click the Check Box next to the desired solenoid valve or switch
to activate or deactivate it. A check mark in the box indicates its
activated.
3.
Check Solenoids to highlight and locate the solenoid valves on the

flow diagram.
4.
Check Gauges to locate the system pressure gauges and display

their current pressure reading on the flow diagram.
5.
Check Cells to locate the IR and TC cells and display their current
cell voltage on the flow diagram.
CHN628
831
832
CHN628
Diagnostics
Service
This section contains common service procedures that may correct
operational problems with the instrument. If you still experience
difficulties after referencing this information, please contact the LECO
Service Department at 269-982-5497 for assistance.
Illustrations .................................................................................. 93
Installing LECO Software ................................................................ 94
Required Settings for LECO Software .......................................... 94
Operating System (OS) Requirements ................................... 94
OS User Permission Requirements ......................................... 94
Data File Permissions ........................................................... 95
Antivirus Software ............................................................... 95
Control Panel Settings ......................................................... 96
Software Installation Procedure ................................................. 96
Configuring the Ethernet Adapter .................................................. 913
Windows 7 ............................................................................ 913
Configuring Firewall Settings ........................................................ 918
Registering Software ................................................................... 919
Troubleshooting Software Registration ...................................... 921
Submitting Registration Information to LECO ............................. 921
Adding an Option or Changing Customer Name .......................... 923
Troubleshooting Copy Protection Key ............................................. 925
Copy Protection Key Error Messages ......................................... 925
Loading Head Alignment and Adjustment ....................................... 926
Initial Alignment .................................................................... 926
Initial Adjustment .................................................................. 930
Loading Head Interface Block Cleaning .......................................... 931
Disassembly .......................................................................... 931
Assembly .............................................................................. 932
Carousel Alignment ..................................................................... 933
TC Cell Removal and Service ........................................................ 935
Removal ............................................................................... 935
Service ................................................................................. 935
IR Cell Removal and Service ......................................................... 936
Removal ............................................................................... 936
Service ................................................................................. 936
Service
CHN628
91
IR Detector Linearization .............................................................. 937

IR Detector Linearization Definitions ......................................... 938
IR Cell Saturation Optimization ..................................................... 939
Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 943
Troubleshooting Table............................................................. 943
92
CHN628
Service
Illustrations
Figure 9-1 Male Mounting Block Top Screws ......................................927
Figure 9-2 Male Mounting Block Screws ............................................928
Figure 9-3 Loading Heading AlignmentInterface Block ......................929
Figure 9-4 Slide Block Speed Adjustments .........................................930
Figure 9-5 Carousel Actuator Arm Alignment .....................................934
Figure 9-6 Carousel Alignment .........................................................934
Service
CHN628
93
Installing LECO Software

The following section explains the required settings, below, and the
installation procedure, page 96, for LECO software. Additional
information can be found in Configuring the Ethernet Adaptor, page
913, Configuring Firewall Settings, page 918, and Registering the
Software, page 919.
Required Settings for LECO Software

Operating System (OS) Requirements
The following table explains the minimum settings required for LECO
software. LECO recommends that the system always be updated to
correspond with the latest service packs available at
www.microsoft.com.
Windows OS
Minimum Requirements
7 (64-bit)
None
*SP=Service
Pack; **URP=Update Rollup; ***IE=Internet Explorer
OS User Permission Requirements

The following table shows the minimum permissions that a user must
have in the Microsoft Windows OS in order to perform certain tasks in
the software. Refer to Users Permissions.
94
Task
Minimum Permission
Using Software
Standard User
Installing Software
Administrator
Upgrading Software
Administrator
Setting up Users
Administrator
LECO Service
Administrator
CHN628
Service
Data File Permissions

To use LECO software, read-write access is required for all the data
files. The proper permissions are automatically set up during the
software installation; however, if these permissions are ever changed,
file access errors can occur. The following table shows the data folders
that require read-write permissions.
Windows
OS
Data Folder (including all

subfolders/files) (Use the appropriate
drive letter, typically C.)
7 (64-bit)
ProgramData\LECO (hidden OS folder)
Antivirus Software
LECO recommends that antivirus checking be turned off
for the files listed below to avoid interference with data
collection or storage.
Service
Windows
OS
Data Folder (including all

subfolders/files) (Use the
appropriate drive letter, typically
C.)
7 (64-bit)
ProgramData\LECO (hidden OS folder)
CHN628
95
Control Panel Settings

Control Panel Item
Power
Options
User
Accounts
Required Setting
Power Schemes
Always On
Turn off Hard Disks
Never
Use Fast User Switching
If Fast User Switching is

active (off by default on PCs
from LECO), close the LECO
software in one account
before switching to a
different account and trying
to run it there.
Software Installation Procedure

The Software must be started at least once on the administrative
level since the software must be able to access and modify the
registry.
Do not install the Copy Protection Key until after the software has
been installed.
96
1.
Verify the instrument is turned off.
2.
Turn on the computer tower.
3.
Install the communications cable (typically Ethernet or USB) as

appropriate for the instrument.
4.
For an Ethernet connection, configure the Ethernet adapter. Refer

to Configuring Ethernet Adapter, page 913.
5.
Log in to the operating system as administrator.
6.
Insert the software installation CD-ROM into the CD-ROM disk

drive (typically D).
7.
Install the LECO DHCPlite software by clicking OK when the

following message appears. (If the LECO DHCPlite software is
already installed or not applicable, this message will not appear.)
8.
If a version of Adobe Reader is already installed, refer to step 14.

If Adobe Reader is not installed, the following dialog box will
appear.
CHN628
Service
9.
Select Next. The following message box will appear to indicate

Adobe Reader is preparing for installation.
10. Determine the folder location for Adobe Reader. Select Next for
the default location, or select Browse, select a different location,
and then select Next.
Service
CHN628
97
11. When the "Ready to Install Program" dialog box appears, click
Install.
12. When the "Setup Completed" dialog box appears, click Finish.
98
CHN628
Service
13. If the instrument software Welcome dialog box does not appear
A.
Select the Start button in the lower left-hand corner.
B.
Select Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.
C.
Enter D:\Setup.exe and then select OK. (The letter D

indicates the location of the CD Rom drive. Typically this
drive is D, but the letter that is entered should correspond
with the CD-ROM drive on the computer's hard drive.)
14. At the instrument software Welcome dialog box, click Next.
Service
CHN628
99
15. Determine the folder location for the software. Select Next for the
default location, or select Browse, select a different location, and
then select Next.
16. Select Next to install the software.
910
CHN628
Service
17. Once the software has installed successfully, select Finish. The
icon for the instrument software will appear on the desktop.
18. After installing the software, it may be necessary to restart the

system. If the following dialog box displays, select Yes to
immediately restart the system.
Service
CHN628
911
19. Turn on the instrument.

20. Turn on the gas supplies.
21. Double-click the desktop icon for the instrument software to start
the software.
22. If the Edit Registration dialog box appears, refer to Registering
the Software, page 919.
912
CHN628
Service
Configuring the Ethernet Adapter

The following procedure is necessary for the proper operation of the
software with a Copy Protection Key and applies for computer systems
that are not supplied by LECO. For computers supplied by LECO, this
configuration has already been completed.
It is required that PCs used for running LECO applications be
configured with a separate Ethernet adapter dedicated for
communications with LECO instrumentation. (Connection to a
network would require a second Ethernet port.)
Windows 7
The following steps apply when using the Windows 7 operating
system.
Service
on the Windows desktop and then click Control Panel.
1.
Click
2.
Click Network and Sharing.
CHN628
913
914
3.
Click Change Adapter Settings.
4.
Right-click on the name of the connection for the instrument and

rename it to LECO Hardware.
5.
Right-click and select Properties.
CHN628
Service
6.
Service
Clear all of the check boxes except Internet Protocol Version 4

(TCP/IPv4).
CHN628
915
7.
916
Highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) by clicking on it

and then select Properties.
CHN628
Service
Service
8.
For IP address, enter 10 10 10 2, and for Subnet mask, enter 255

255 255 0. The remaining fields should be empty as shown
below.
9.
Click OK.
CHN628
917
Configuring Firewall Settings

When the LECO software is installed, it automatically configures the
Microsoft Windows firewall settings for the instrument software. (If the
Microsoft Windows firewall settings are ever changed, the easiest fix is
to reinstall the LECO software.)
The following steps apply only when a firewall program other than
Microsoft Windows is used.
1. If another firewall program is installed, search all folders and
subfolders in C:\Program Files (x86)\LECO.
These are the default locations; however, the default location may
vary if it was changed during the software installation.
2. Follow the instructions for the firewall program to grant these
.exe files permission in order to run the LECO software.
918
CHN628
Service
Registering Software
With a new instrument and PC from LECO, all that is required is to
insert the copy protection key into a USB port. Refer to
Troubleshooting Copy Protection Key, page 925, for further
information.
The following procedure applies when the license is being upgraded
due to the addition of new hardware or a new software version. The
software must be registered before it can be used. If a PC is not
purchased from LECO, refer to Submitting Registration Information to
LECO, page 921, and contact LECO Service for further information
about registering the instrument.
Do not insert the copy protection key into the USB port until
the LECO software is installed and the PC has been
rebooted.
Service
1.
Install Copy Protection Key into a USB port on the computer.
2.
Double-click the software's desktop icon.
3.
In the software main window, click Help and then click About.
The following dialog box appears:
CHN628
919
920
4.
Click Change. The Edit License dialog box will appear.
5.
Registration information can be entered in two ways as explained

below. It is preferable to copy and paste the information to help
avoid errors.
Type in the registration information exactly as it appears.
If the upgrade information is received in an email from LECO,

copy and paste the registration information as explained in
the following steps.
A.
In the email, highlight the information beginning with

<base64> ........ </base64> as shown below.
B.
Copy the information by pressing at the same time Ctrl and

C on the keyboard.
C.
On the Edit License dialog box, click Paste. (Do not press
CTRL and V on the keyboard.)
D.
Click Save.
E.
Click OK when the following dialog box appears:
CHN628
Service
Troubleshooting Software Registration

Error Message
Checks and Solutions

Verify all entries in the Edit License
dialog box exactly match the registration
information.
Invalid Registration Error Message
Check capitalization.
Check that the product version is correct.
For example, the Product Version in the
Edit License dialog box will appear as 400
(no period) but on the Help/About dialog
box, the product version will appear as
4.00 (with a period).
Check that the registration number is
correct.
Check that the spacing between words is
accurate.
Submitting Registration Information to LECO

If the PC is not purchased from LECO, it may be necessary to submit
the registration information to LECO Service. Contact LECO Service
who will assist you in the registration process. LECO Service will
require your company name, serial number, model number, and any
options purchased. The following section explains this procedure.
Service
1.
In the software, click Help and then select About.
2.
On the About dialog box, click Change.
CHN628
921
922
3.
The Edit License dialog box will appear. Enter your Customer
(company), Instrument Serial Number, and Options.
4.
Click Copy.
5.
Open a blank email message and press Ctrl and V on the

keyboard to paste the license information into the email message.
6.
Send the email or just the Key number to the LECO designee.
CHN628
Service
Adding an Option or Changing Customer Name
Service
1.
Request/purchase option from LECO. LECO will provide a new key

number and registration information.
2.
In the software, click Help on the Menu bar and then select
About.
3.
On the About dialog box, click Change.
4.
The Edit License dialog box will appear.
CHN628
923
5.
924
Registration information can be entered in two ways as explained

below. It is preferable to copy and paste the information to help
avoid errors.
Type in the registration information exactly as it appears.
If the upgrade information is received in an email from LECO,

paste the registration information as explained in the
following steps.
A.
Select all of the text in the email from LECO.
B.
On the Edit License dialog box, click Paste. The information

from the email, including customer name and any options
will appear in the Edit License dialog box.
C.
Click Save.
CHN628
Service
Troubleshooting Copy Protection Key
A Copy Protection Key is required to use the software.
Do not insert the copy protection key into the USB port until the
LECO software is installed and the PC has been rebooted.
The Copy Protection Key should remain installed in one of the

USB ports while using the software.
Copy Protection Key Error Messages
The Copy Protection Key Not Found or License Not Valid dialog box
may appear if the copy protection key is not installed, the software is
not registered, or the software is already running. Follow the steps
below.
Verify the copy protection key is installed. If not,

1. Click OK, and then insert the copy protection key.
2. On the Licenses dialog box, click Close. The software login will
appear.
If the copy protection key is installed, the software may not be

registered.
1. Click OK.
2. Insert the copy protection key. The Licenses dialog box will
appear.
3. Click on the old version and then click Change. Follow the
instructions in Registering Software, beginning with step 5.
Service
If the copy protection key is installed, the software may already be

running on the computer. Click Close.
CHN628
925
Loading Head Alignment and Adjustment

Initial Alignment
Before the load head assembly is ever placed onto the load head
interface block, the following procedure must be followed to insure
easy removal/installation of the load head assembly.
1.
926
Loosen the following screws to allow alignment the loading head

assembly, to the load head interface block on the dual furnace
assembly. Refer to Figure 10-32 for screw part numbers.
A.
Loosen (2) screws which secure the male mounting block to

the loading head assembly. Refer to Figure 9-1.
B.
Loosen the screw which secures the connector assembly to

the male mounting block.
C.
Loosen the (2) setscrews in the male mounting block. Refer

to Figure 9-2.
D.
Loosen the (2) screws that secures the female mounting

block to load head interface block on the furnace assembly.
Refer to Figure 9-3.
E.
Loosen the screw which secures the connector assembly to

the female mounting block.
F.
Back off the setscrew in the female mounting block.
2.
With everything above loosened, carefully align loading head

assembly and the load head interface block on the furnace
assembly.
3.
Grab the loading head at each side, carefully line-up the male
electrical connector on the loading head and the female connector
on the loading head interface block. At the same time, verify the
three nipples from the loading head are lined up with the bores
on the load head interface block. Once aligned, push down. You
may hear a hissing sound.
4.
Tighten the captive screws in the loading head to secure it to the

loading head interface block. Any hissing sound should disappear.
If a hissing sound continues, remove load head and refer to the
loading head interface block maintenance on page 931.
CHN628
Service
5.
After the loading head is secured to the load head interface block.
A.
Tighten the screw which secures the connector assembly to

the female mounting block.
B.
Tighten the setscrew in the female mounting block until it

hits the base loading head.
C.
Tighten the (2) screws which secure the female mounting

block to the base loading head.
D.
Tighten the screw which secures the connector assembly to

the male mounting block.
E.
Tighten the (2) setscrews, in the male mounting block until

it hits the loading head top.
F.
Tighten the (2) screws, 190-867, which secure the male

mounting block to the load head assembly.
6.
To check alignment, remove and install the CHN628 loading head

assembly.
7.
If load head is easily removed and installed then you have

successfully aligned the CHN628 load head assembly.
8.
If the loading head is NOT easily removed and installed, then

repeat steps 1 thru 4.
Figure 9-1
Male Mounting Block Top Screws
Service
CHN628
927
Number
Description
Setscrews
Screws
Figure 9-2
Male Mounting Block Screws
928
CHN628
Service
Number
Description
Setscrew
Female Mounting Block
Screws
Setscrew
Figure 9-3
Loading Heading AlignmentInterface Block
Service
CHN628
929
Initial Adjustment
1.
Adjust slide block speed by:

A.
Click Diagnostics and select Solenoids and Switches.
B.
Uncheck the Slide Block Seal, SV18, to turn it off.
C.
From the Diagnostics screen, toggle the slide block, SV13

and SV14, open and closed. Adjust the speed control screws
on SV13 and SV14 to slow the movement if necessary.
Solenoid valves SV13 and SV14 are the only valves on the
pneumatics manifold that have speed adjustments.
2.
Adjust the carousel indexer. Refer to the Carousel Alignment

Procedure on page 933.
Figure 9-4
Slide Block Speed Adjustments
930
CHN628
Service
Loading Head Interface Block Cleaning

This procedure should be used to clean and service the Loading Head
Interface Block.
Perform the Instrument Shutdown procedure before removing the
Loading Head. Refer to Instrument Shutdown on page 512.
Disassembly
1.
Turn off the pneumatic gas supply.
2.
Remove the loading head. Refer to the load head removal

procedure on page 926.
3.
Remove top furnace plate.
4.
Remove lance assembly. Refer to the lance assembly removal

procedure.
5.
Remove and inspect the loading head block interface seal o-ring,
601-504. Lightly apply a thin coating of vacuum grease to the
o-ring.
6.
From Diagnostics access the Solenoids and Switches screen.

A.
Toggle the Set Slide Block Seal (SV18) solenoid to relieve

pressure in lines.
B.
Toggle Slide Block Open and Close (SV13/SV14) solenoid to

relieve pressure in lines.
7.
Remove the (2) 8-32 socket head screws, 190-867, which secure
the valve cap.
8.
Carefully remove the valve cap. Verify the three o-rings

underneath the valve cap remain on the interface block.
9.
Inspect and clean valve cap.
10. Inspect and clean three o-rings. Lightly apply a thin coating of
vacuum grease to the o-rings.
11. Remove (2) balls, 805-079, and (2) springs, 617-212, from two
outside bores.
12. Inspect and clean the balls, springs, and holes.
Service
CHN628
931
Assembly
932
1.
Insert (2) springs, 617-212, into two outside holes in load head
interface block. Springs cannot be inserted into middle hole.
2.
Place (2) balls, 805-079 into two outside holes in load head
interface block.
3.
Lightly coat the o-rings with vacuum grease and place the three
o-rings into the three holes on the load head interface block.
4.
Place the clean valve cap onto load head interface block. Line-up
the corresponding holes on the valve cap to the mating holes on
the load head interface block. Tighten the screws to secure valve
cap.
5.
Install the loading head to interface block seal o-ring.
6.
Apply a light coating of vacuum grease to the or-ing on top of the

lance assembly and install the lance assembly into the loading
head.
7.
Turn on the pneumatic gas supply.
CHN628
Service
Carousel Alignment
Alignment must be after once the loading head is adjusted. Refer to
Loading Head Adjustment on page 926.
When the carousel is properly adjusted it will not make a ringing noise
when actuated.
PINCH HAZARD
Keep your hands away from the carousel and loading head
during operation.
1.
Click Diagnostics and select Solenoids and Switches.
2.
Uncheck the Slide Block Seal (SV18) solenoid to open it.
3.
Click the Slide Block solenoid (SV13/SV14) and move the slide
block to the closed position.
4.
Loosen the carousel actuator arm mounting screws. Refer to

Figure 9-5.
5.
Position the hole in the center of the arm over the hole in the
slide block.
6.
Be sure that the edges of the two pieces are parallel.
7.
Tighten the carousel actuator mounting screws just enough that

the arm can be moved along the slot.
8.
Place the carousel on the loading head.
9.
The lever on the arm should line up with the tooth on the
carousel. If it doesnt move the actuator arm until it does. Refer
to Figure 9-6.
10. Once it is aligned, take the carousel off and tighten the two
screws.
11. Place the carousel back on the loading head and cycle the Slide
Block solenoid several times to insure that it is indexing the
carousel one position at a time.
12. If the carousel is moving too fast or to slow in either direction,
adjust the speed controls on solenoid valves SV13 and SV14.
Refer to Figure 9-4.
Service
CHN628
933
Figure 9-5
Carousel Actuator Arm Alignment
Figure 9-6
Carousel Alignment
934
CHN628
Service
TC Cell Removal and Service

This procedure should be used to clean and service the TC Cell.
Perform the Instrument Shutdown procedure before removing the TC
cell. Refer to Instrument Shutdown on page 512.
SHOCK HAZARD
Turn the AC power OFF and disconnect the instrument from
the facility electrical power source.
Removal
1.
Remove the right side panel from the instrument.
2.
Remove the plastic cover from the oven assembly.
3.
Loosen the TC cell Thumbscrew.
4.
Remove the TC cell cover.
5.
Disconnect the network electrical connection to the TC cell.
6.
Loosen the Captive Screw.
7.
Pull the TC cell away and out of the oven.
1.
Check the condition of the o-rings. If they are cracked or worn

replace them.
2.
If you having a problem with the TC Cell, ambient values, a gas

leak, or measurement results, contact the LECO service
department for further information.
Service
Service
CHN628
935
IR Cell Removal and Service

This procedure should be used to clean and service the IR Cell.
Perform the Instrument Shutdown procedure before removing the IR
cell. Refer to Instrument Shutdown on page 512.
SHOCK HAZARD
Turn the AC power OFF and disconnect the instrument from
the facility electrical power source.
Removal
1.
Remove the right side panel from the instrument.
2.
Remove the plastic cover from the oven assembly.
3.
Remove the foam insulation covering the IR cells.
4.
Remove the two IR cell mounting screws.
5.
Pull the IR cell away and out of the oven.
1.
Check the condition of the o-rings. If they are cracked or worn

replace them.
2.
If you having a problem with the IR Cell, IR Cell ambient values,

a gas leak, or measurement results, contact the LECO service
department for further information.
Service
936
CHN628
Service
IR Detector Linearization
Before the instrument or a replacement IR detector is installed at a
customer site, the reference and saturation values are determined for
the IR detector. These values are entered by LECO into the software to
produce correct analytical results. For accurate analysis results, these
values must match characteristics of the detector. The following
procedure should only be used if an IR detector is replaced or if the
values have been lost and need re-entered.
It is only necessary to perform this procedure if an IR detector is
replaced. The reference and saturation values to enter during this
procedure can be found on a tag attached to the replacement IR
detector.
1.
Click Configuration and select IR Detectors. The IR Detector

Linearization screen will appear.
2.
All the IR Detectors for the system are listed. If the IR detector
has been replaced, enter the reference and saturation that are
provided on the tag attached to the replacement IR detector.
3.
Refer to the IR Detector Linearization Definitions, page 938, for

After values have been changed, existing methods must be

recalibrated.
Service
CHN628
937
IR Detector Linearization Definitions

Referencethe output voltage of the cell when no analyte is present.
Saturationthe output voltage of the cell when the maximum amount
of analyte it can measure is present.
Importused to import a file of reference and saturation values that
had been previously exported for all IR detectors. This will overwrite
the reference and saturation values for all detectors. Ensure the values
being imported are correct for the currently installed detectors before
you import them.
Exportused to export or save a file of reference and saturation
values for all IR detectors.
Get Readingused to enter the reference and saturation values by
running the appropriate amount of analyte (none or max) through the
system and capturing the voltage.
Printused to print out the reference and saturation values. If a break
and slope table is used, it will also print.
938
CHN628
Service
IR Cell Saturation Optimization

This procedure will automatically adjust the IR detectors saturation
value, improving the characterization of the individual IR detector in
the instrument as a system. This procedure should be used during the
installation of new IR Cells. It can also be used to compensate for
minor variations over the life of the IR cell.
EDTA, LECO P/N 502-092, is required to perform this procedure.
1.
Create a method using all of the default method properties. Refer

to Create a Method page 436.
2.
Click Diagnostics and select Leak Check. Refer to Leak Check on

page 816.
3.
Service
A.
Perform the Whole Oxygen Leak Check.
B.
Perform the Whole Helium Leak Check.
C.
Steps A and B must pass before continuing.
Click Diagnostics and select Systems Check.

A.
Perform a Systems Check.
B.
All items in Systems Check must pass before continuing.
4.
Analyze 15 blanks. Refer to the Blank Login on page 517.
5.
Choose the last 10 blank results to calculate the statistical

results. The standard deviation of the last 10 blanks should be
less than or equal to 10 ppm or 0.001% for carbon.
6.
Set the system blank based on the last 10 blank results run in the
previous step. Refer to the Blank Calibration on page 531.
7.
Define EDTA as a calibration standard. Refer to Define Calibration

Standards on page 447.
8.
Analyze 3 samples of EDTA at approximately 100 mg. These

samples are used for conditioning and will not be used for
analytical purposes later.
CHN628
939
9.
Analyze the samples listed in the table below. Use the Method
created in step 1. Log in each sample using the drop down box in
Name for the EDTA samples.
Replicates
Standard
Mass (mg)
EDTA
50
EDTA
100
EDTA
150
EDTA
200
EDTA
250
EDTA
300
EDTA
350
10. Select the sample data run in step 9 and click Configuration, then
select Calibration.
940
CHN628
Service
11. Select the Carbon cell from the cell drop down box.
12. Change the plot to Relative Area.
13. Within the grid of the calibration screen, select the results of the
EDTA analyses.
14. Click Edit and select Optimize Saturation.
Service
CHN628
941
If any of the data points are shown in red and excluded

automatically, override them and include the points by double clicking
on the excluded data row within the grid.
15. The software will automatically calculate an optimized saturation

value for the Carbon IR Cell and display a dialogue box with the
new and previous Carbon IR cell saturation values. Select OK to
accept the new carbon IR cell saturation value.
16. Recalibrate all the existing methods within the database using the
new carbon IR settings and table.
942
CHN628
Service
Troubleshooting
Use the troubleshooting table to locate and correct problems that may
develop with the instrument.
Troubleshooting Table
Observed Problem
All parameters in the

software Ambient Chart
are flat-lining.
Some parameters in the

software Ambient Chart
are flat-lining.
Readings and valve states

are wrong.
Service
Possible Cause
Recommended Solution
Power to instrument
maybe be off.
Check that the power cord is

plugged in.
The power supply (PS1)

may have failed.
Check that the LEDs on the

cards are lit. Check that 24 VDC
is present on J512AL and
J512AK on the distribution card
666-512.
Communications to the
instrument may be lost.
Try to reset the network in the

software diagnostics page. If
this doesn't work, exit software,
cycle power to the instrument
and restart the software. If this
doesn't work, check the
Ethernet connection between PC
and instrument.
There is a problem with

the sensor that is flatlining. If the flat-line is at
the limit of the range of
that sensor, the sensor
may be disconnected.
Check electrical connections to

sensors. Check that valves are
working properly.
A circuit card might not be

working properly.
Using the cabinet schematic,

check if all flat-lining
parameters in the ambient chart
are from the same circuit card.
If so, check that the LED's on
the card are lit. Check electrical
connections to the card. Also
check the log file.
Check the log file for

errors.
Check for electrical shorts on

circuit cards.
CHN628
943
Observed Problem
The furnace will not heat.
The detector oven will not

heat.
944
Possible Cause
The diode (CR1) on the

mechanical relay (K2)
might have been installed
backwards.
This will appear in the error log

as an error with the FPGA on
the furnace card. The band on
the diode (CR1) should be on
position 0 of the mechanical
relay (K2).
The connector J394H

might not be connected
correction or a thermostat
may have tripped, opening
the interlock.
This will appear in the error log

as an error with the FPGA on
the furnace card. Check the
connections on the 666602X170 furnace card (A09).
A thermocouple might
have failed or became
disconnected.
With the furnace off, check the

resistance of the furnace
thermocouple (MT08) which
should be about 1.
A furnace heating element

may have failed.
With the furnace off, measure

the resistance of the heating
elements in series which should
be about 20 at room
temperature.
The cell oven fan may

have failed.
Check the cell oven fan (FAN3)

is working properly.
One of the oven heaters

may have failed or become
disconnected.
Check the resistance of the

oven heaters (HTR1 & HTR2) in
parallel should be about 290.
CHN628
Service
Observed Problem
The reduction tube IR line

heater (CHN628 only)
and/or ballast oven will
not heat.
The reduction tube is too

hot.
The ballast oven is too

hot.
Service
Possible Cause
A temperature sensor may

be malfunctioning or
became disconnected.

temperature sensors: reduction
tube thermocouple (MT05)
should be between 1 and 5.
The ballast (MT03) thermistor
should be about 5000 at room
temperature and decrease with
increasing temperature.
One of the two fans in the

ballast oven may have
failed.
Check the ballast oven blower

(FAN1), ballast fan (FAN2) and
ballast fan-back side (FAN4) are
working properly.
A heater may have failed

or became disconnected.

heaters: the reduction tube
heater (HTR7) should be about
175. The ballast heaters
(HTR3 and HTR4) should be
about 260. Note that the
ballast will not heat if the side
panel is open: check that SW15
is working properly.
The reduction tube

thermocouple (MT05) may
Check the location and

resistance of the reduction tube
thermocouple (MT05); it should
be between 1 and 5.
The triac on the 666514X140 dual heater card

(A7) may have failed
short.
Check that the 666-514X140

dual heater card (A7) is working
properly.
A temperature sensor may

Check the location and

resistance of the ballast (MT03)
thermistor; it should be about
5000 at room temperature
and decrease with increasing
temperature.
The ambient room

temperature may be too
high.
Check that the room

temperature is 35C (95F) or
less. Check that there is
sufficient air flow around the
instrument.
The triac on the 666514X140 dual heater card

(A7) may have failed
short.
Check that the 666-514X140

dual heater card (A7) is working
properly.
CHN628
945
Observed Problem
The thermal electric cooler

temperature is not holding
at 5C (CN628 and FP628
only).
Samples do not drop out

of carousel into loading
head.
The TC Cell temperature

is not 57.3+/- 0.5C.
946
Possible Cause
The Peltier Cooler (HP1)

might have failed or
become disconnected.

Peltier Cooler (HP1) it should be
about 10 at room
temperature.
The TEC Thermistor might

have failed or become
disconnected.
Check the resistance of the TEC

Thermistor (MT9); it should be
12,700 at 5C and 5,000 at
25C.
The TEC Exhaust fan may

have failed or become
disconnected.
Check that the TEC Exhaust Fan

(FAN2) is spinning.
Samples wrapped with too

large of a diameter.
Wrap samples so that they fit

smoothly into carousel.
Carousel not properly

aligned.
Refer to Loading Head

Alignment and Adjustment,
page 926.
Sample drop jaw may be

stuck to due dirt.
Refer to Loading Head Cleaning,

page 634.
Electrical connection on
bottom right side of
loading head may be
damaged or not lined up.
Verify the condition of the 2prong electrical connector on

the loading head. Verify that
the connector is properly
aligned to the matching
connector on the interface
block. Refer to Loading Head
Alignment and Adjustment,
page 926.
Solenoid plunger or
compression spring may
be damaged or corroded.
Check the 619-976 plunger and

the 617-221 spring for wear
and replace if necessary. Refer
to Figure 10-33.
The TC cell heater leads

may have broken away
from the terminal blocks
on the 666-721X120 card
(A10).
Strip the leads of the heater

(HTR6) and re-connect them to
TB2 & TB3 of the 666-721X130
card (A10).
There may be no power to

the 666-721X120 TC cell
block heater card (A10).
Check that the power from the

666-721X130 TC cell card (A10)
is connected from J291F to
J634.
There may be no signal

from the 666-721X120 TC
cell block heater card
(A10).
Check that the signal to the

666-721X130 TC cell card (A10)
is connected from J634A to
J291H.
CHN628
Service
Observed Problem
The results are

consistently noisy.
Low IR cell voltage

reading in Ambient Chart
(less than 1.5 volts).
Persistent noise spikes on

TC Cell reading.
High Blanks
Service
Possible Cause
A fan in the detector oven

or ballast could have failed
or become disconnected.
Check that all fans are working

properly.
One of the back or side

panels might not be in
place.
Check that the side and back

panels are in place so that
ambient air cannot enter the
ballast oven.
The TC cell might not be

properly insulated.
Check that the cover of the TC

cell is properly in place. Check
for potential air leaks into the
TC cell.
Cell may be dirty.
Remove cell for cleaning. Refer

to IR Cell Removal and Service,
page 936.
IR emitter may be failing.
Emitter replacement kit may be

required.
Cell may be dirty.
Remove cell for cleaning. Refer

to TC Cell Removal and Service,
page 935.
O-rings at IR Cell
connection may be dry.
Check o-rings at IR Cell

connections.
Atmosphere may be
leaking into system.
Check system for leaks. Refer to

Leak Check, page 816.
Reduction catalyst may be

spent.
Repack reduction heater tube.

Refer to Reduction Heater Tube
Packing,
page 619.
CHN628
947
Observed Problem
A pinch valve is not

toggling.
Ballast fill timeout
Ballast piston to home

timeout
948
Possible Cause
Pneumatic gas is not being

supplied to the pinch
valve.
Verify that pneumatic pressure

is present in the flexible line
connected to the pinch valve.
Electrical signal is not

being applied to the pinch
valve solenoid.
Verify that the electrical

connector is connected to the
pinch valve and is providing
24VDC when the pinch valve is
toggled.
O-rings in the pinch valve

body are stuck or leaking.
Disassemble and inspect pinch

valve body and o-rings. Clean,
grease or replace o-rings if
necessary.
Pinch valve solenoid has

failed.
Replace solenoid if necessary.
Ballast is filling too slowly

because of a leak in the
system.
Check system for leaks. Refer to

Leak Check, page 816.
Ballast fill timeout is not

set properly for methods
with slow burns.
Verify method parameters
Ballast piston is not able to

return to home position
because ballast exhaust
line is restricted.
Check that C-Flex tubing

running from PV3 to back of
unit is not crimped or restricted.
Check that PV3 is opening
properly.
Ballast piston home sensor

is not reading correctly.
Check that piston home switch

(SW13) is connected and is
functioning properly.
CHN628
Service
10
Illustrations
The Illustration chapter can be used to locate parts within the

instrument and part numbers.
Figure 10-1 Pneumatic Manifold Assembly .........................................103
Figure 10-2 TC Cell Assembly Connector ...........................................104
Figure 10-3 TC Cell Manifold Assembly ..............................................105
Figure 10-4 TC Cell Assembly Card ...................................................107
Figure 10-5 TC Cell Leads................................................................108
Figure 10-6 TC Cell Assembly ..........................................................109
Figure 10-7 Oven Blower Assembly ..................................................1010
Figure 10-8 Heater Plates Assembly .................................................1011
Figure 10-9 Attaching Heater Plate Assembly .....................................1012
Figure 10-10 Particle Filter Upper Block Assembly ..............................1013
Figure 10-11 Particle Filter Lower Block Assembly ..............................1014
Figure 10-12 Particle Filter Front Door Assembly ................................1015
Figure 10-13 Doser Block Assembly ..................................................1016
Figure 10-14 Secondary Oven Upper Wall Panel Assembly ...................1017
Figure 10-15 Secondary Oven Upper Wall Assembly ...........................1018
Figure 10-16 Catalyst Heater Lower Block Assembly ...........................1019
Figure 10-17 Catalyst Heater Back Panel Assembly ............................1020
Figure 10-18 Catalyst Heater Front Panel Assembly ............................1021
Figure 10-19 Pinch Valve Plate Assembly ..........................................1023
Figure 10-20 Pinch Valve Electrical Assembly .....................................1024
Figure 10-21 Top Panel Assembly .....................................................1025
Figure 10-22 Power Distribution Panel Assembly ................................1026
Figure 10-23 Power Distribution Panel Card Assembly .........................1027
Figure 10-24 Power Distribution Panel Wiring Harness Assembly ..........1029
Figure 10-25 IR Cell Assembly .........................................................1030
Figure 10-26 Left Side Panel Assembly..............................................1031
Figure 10-27 Dual Furnace Cap Assembly ..........................................1032
Figure 10-28 Dosing Valve Pneumatic Cylinder Assembly ....................1033
Figure 10-29 Dosing Valve 8-Port Valve Block Assembly .....................1034
Figure 10-30 Dosing Valve Spring Clamp Assembly ............................1035
Figure 10-31 Micron Filter Assembly .................................................1036
Figure 10-32 Loading Head Sliding Block Assembly ............................1037
Figure 10-33 Loading Head Top Block Assembly .................................1039
Illustrations
CHN628
101
Figure 10-34 Loading Head Solenoid Assembly ..................................1041

Figure 10-35 Loading Head Air Cylinder Assembly ..............................1042
Figure 10-36 Loading Head Cylinder Cover Assembly ..........................1043
Figure 10-37 Oven Door Assembly ...................................................1044
Figure 10-38 Oven Heater Shelf Assembly .........................................1045
Figure 10-39 Ballast Plate Assembly .................................................1046
Figure 10-40 Ballast Top Bracket Assembly .......................................1047
Figure 10-41 Ballast Interface Manifold Block Assembly ......................1048
Figure 10-42 Connect Interface Manifold To Ballast ............................1049
Figure 10-43 IR Cell Mounting Base Assembly....................................1050
Figure 10-44 TC Cell Interface Manifold Assembly ..............................1051
Figure 10-45 Oven Fan Bracket Assembly .........................................1052
Figure 10-46 Oven Enclosure Assembly .............................................1053
Figure 10-47 TC Cell Assembly.........................................................1054
Figure 10-48 Oven Mounting Plate Assembly .....................................1055
Figure 10-49 Pneumatic and Furnace Flow Manifold Assembly ..............1056
Figure 10-52 Fan Assembly .............................................................1060
Figure 10-53 IR Cell Bypass Assembly ..............................................1061
Figure 10-54 Door Assembly............................................................1063
Figure 10-55 Heater Wire Assembly ..................................................1065
Figure 10-56 Top Furnace Plate Assembly .........................................1067
Figure 10-57 Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Assembly...........1068
Figure 10-58 Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Bottom
Plate Assembly ..............................................................................1069
Figure 10-59 Upper Fan Assembly ....................................................1071
Figure 10-60 Left and Right Furnace Manifold Assembly ......................1072
Figure 10-61 Furnace Manifold Solenoid Assembly..............................1073
Figure 10-62 Furnace Manifold Pressure Relief Valve Assembly ............1074
Figure 10-63 Thermoelectric Cooler Condensing Block Assembly ..........1075
Figure 10-64 Thermoelectric Cooler Heat Pump Assembly ...................1076
Figure 10-65 Thermoelectric Cooler Chiller Cover Assembly .................1077
Figure 10-66 Thermoelectric Cooler Tubing Assembly .........................1078
Figure 10-67 Furnace Reduction Heater Assembly ..............................1079
Figure 10-68 Catalyst Heater Assembly .............................................1080
Figure 10-69 Filter Door Assembly....................................................1081
Figure 10-70 Bracket and Fan Assembly............................................1082
Figure 10-71 Heater Cable Assembly ................................................1083
Figure 10-72 Heater Power Cable Assembly .......................................1084
102
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-1
Pneumatic Manifold Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
103
Figure 10-2
TC Cell Assembly Connector
104
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-3
TC Cell Manifold Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
105
106
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-4
TC Cell Assembly Card
Illustrations
CHN628
107
Figure 10-5
TC Cell Leads
108
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-6
TC Cell Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
109
Figure 10-7
Oven Blower Assembly
1010
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-8
Heater Plates Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1011
Figure 10-9
Attaching Heater Plate Assembly
1012
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-10
Particle Filter Upper Block Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1013
Figure 10-11
Particle Filter Lower Block Assembly
1014
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-12
Particle Filter Front Door Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1015
Figure 10-13
Doser Block Assembly
1016
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-14
Secondary Oven Upper Wall Panel Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1017
Figure 10-15
Secondary Oven Upper Wall Assembly
1018
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-16
Catalyst Heater Lower Block Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1019
Figure 10-17
Catalyst Heater Back Panel Assembly
1020
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-18
Catalyst Heater Front Panel Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1021
1022
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-19
Pinch Valve Plate Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1023
Figure 10-20
Pinch Valve Electrical Assembly
1024
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-21
Top Panel Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1025
Figure 10-22
Power Distribution Panel Assembly
1026
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-23
Power Distribution Panel Card Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1027
1028
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-24
Power Distribution Panel Wiring Harness Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1029
Figure 10-25
IR Cell Assembly
1030
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-26
Left Side Panel Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1031
Figure 10-27
Dual Furnace Cap Assembly
1032
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-28
Dosing Valve Pneumatic Cylinder Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1033
Figure 10-29
Dosing Valve 8-Port Valve Block Assembly
1034
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-30
Dosing Valve Spring Clamp Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1035
Figure 10-31
Micron Filter Assembly
1036
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-32
Loading Head Sliding Block Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1037
1038
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-33
Loading Head Top Block Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1039
1040
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-34
Loading Head Solenoid Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1041
Figure 10-35
Loading Head Air Cylinder Assembly
1042
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-36
Loading Head Cylinder Cover Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1043
Figure 10-37
Oven Door Assembly
1044
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-38
Oven Heater Shelf Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1045
Figure 10-39
Ballast Plate Assembly
1046
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-40
Ballast Top Bracket Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1047
Figure 10-41
Ballast Interface Manifold Block Assembly
1048
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-42
Connect Interface Manifold To Ballast
Illustrations
CHN628
1049
Figure 10-43
IR Cell Mounting Base Assembly
1050
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-44
TC Cell Interface Manifold Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1051
Figure 10-45
Oven Fan Bracket Assembly
1052
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-46
Oven Enclosure Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1053
Figure 10-47
TC Cell Assembly
1054
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-48
Oven Mounting Plate Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1055
Figure 10-49
Pneumatic and Furnace Flow Manifold Assembly
1056
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-50
Pneumatic Manifold Block Assembly 1 of 2
Illustrations
CHN628
1057
1058
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-51
Pneumatic Manifold Block Assembly 2 of 2
Illustrations
CHN628
1059
Figure 10-52
Fan Assembly
1060
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-53
IR Cell Bypass Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1061
1062
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-54
Door Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1063
1064
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-55
Heater Wire Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1065
1066
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-56
Top Furnace Plate Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1067
Figure 10-57
Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Assembly
1068
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-58
Primary and Secondary Electric Furnace Bottom Plate Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1069
1070
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-59
Upper Fan Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1071
Figure 10-60
Left and Right Furnace Manifold Assembly
1072
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-61
Furnace Manifold Solenoid Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1073
Figure 10-62
Furnace Manifold Pressure Relief Valve Assembly
1074
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-63
Thermoelectric Cooler Condensing Block Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1075
Figure 10-64
Thermoelectric Cooler Heat Pump Assembly
1076
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-65
Thermoelectric Cooler Chiller Cover Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1077
Figure 10-66
Thermoelectric Cooler Tubing Assembly
1078
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-67
Furnace Reduction Heater Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1079
Figure 10-68
Catalyst Heater Assembly
1080
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-69
Filter Door Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1081
Figure 10-70
Bracket and Fan Assembly
1082
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-71
Heater Cable Assembly
Illustrations
CHN628
1083
Figure 10-72
Heater Power Cable Assembly
1084
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-73
Pneumatic Manifold Assembly Part 1
Illustrations
CHN628
1085
Figure 10-74
1086
CHN628
Illustrations
Figure 10-75
Illustrations
CHN628
1087
1088
CHN628
Illustrations
11
Schematics
The Schematics chapter provides electronic information for service

of the instrument. For part numbers of circuit boards, assemblies
and components refer to the schematic diagrams.
Figure 11-1 Distribution and Power Entry ..........................................113
Figure 11-2 Pneumatic Flow Card .....................................................114
Figure 11-3 Heater Control ..............................................................115
Illustrations
CHN628
111
11-2
CHN628
Illustrations
10
Name:
DISTRIBUTION & POWER ENTRY

WIRING HARNESSES
H3
H2
H1
TO PC
619-782
622-001-605
619-231
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
AC_SUPPLY
DC_SUPPLY
PNEUMATIC
LOAD_HEAD
A1
ETHERNET-CAN_BRIDGE
J573B
J573C
A2
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
620-677
619-318
Location:
666-573X
A40
ETHERNET
ECLIPSE
618-044
ECLIPSE
ECLIPSE
H2
18"
H6
H7
H8
Module Sheet
TOP-TopTop
J512B
ECLIPSE
618-044
18"
H9
ECL_DUAL_HTR_V8
J512C
ECLIPSE
618-040
36"
H9
ECL_DUAL_HTR_V7
J512D
ECLIPSE
618-044
18"
H9
ECLIPSE_IR
J512E
ECLIPSE
618-040
36"
H9
ECLIPSE_TC
J512H
ECLIPSE
618-044
18"
H9
ECLIPSE_TEC
J512I
ECLIPSE
618-045
54"
H9 ECL_PNEUMATIC_FLOW
J512J
ECLIPSE
618-040
36"
H9
666-512X
J512AP
HOST-IN
HOST-OUT
A2A
H5
151035
ECLIPSE DISTRIBUTION
ETHERNET
H4
11
J512AQ
666-310X210
ECLIPSE_ETHERNET
ECLIPSE
4-B1
4-B7
4-D1
4-G1
3-F1
3-A3
ECLIPSE_OVEN
F2
J512K
622-001-307
622-001-308
625-601-621
622-001-261
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
AC_POWER
DC_POWER
PV_PLATE_BALLAST
JUMPER_FAN
H9
H10
J573A
DC POWER IN
J512P
J512AL
J512AK
H12
H11
J512Q
J512R
POWER SUPPLY
622-001-368
619-110
619-230
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
WIRING_HARNESS
ECLIPSE
BALLST_FAN
TE_COOLER
LOAD_HEAD
H14
H13
H15
PS1
V+
J512A
V+
V-
H16
619-288
622-001-369
622-001-375
622-001-388
622-001-018
24V
ASSY_CABLE
ASSY_CABLE
ASSY_CABLE
ASSEMBLY
POWER_SUPPLY
HEATER
POWER_HEATER
JUMPER_PV2
TC_CELL
V+
V-
H2
+24VDC
+24VDC
24GND
+24VDC
24GND
24GND
J512F
H2
+24VDC
NC
24GND
+24VDC_RET
24GND
2
3
J512G
J512AF
+24VDC_IN
+24VDC
NC
+24VDC
+24VDC_RET
24GND
24GND
GND
J512L
H1
DETECTOR OVEN
H1
RSENSE+
+24VDC
NC
+24VDC
RSENSE-
24GND
24GND
J512L
AC_HI_A
GND
AC_LO_A
24GND
24GND
A3A
FAN_1-
FAN_2+
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
FAN_2-
J534
1
2
FAN3
ECLIPSE
A7
HEATER1-
DUAL_HTR_V7
4-C7
HEATER2-
HEATER2+
H5
HTR1
A8
4-C1
619-221
OVEN_HEATER_1
H5
DUAL_HTR_V8
HTR2
H5
RECEPTACLE
709-806-720
AC1
LC1
H1
H1
AC2
230V
J51
CB1
LINE_FILTER
H1
GND
H1
LINE1
LINE2
GND
LOAD1
FL1
20A
LOAD2
H1
LINE1
H1
LINE2
610-052
PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND.
MAIN_BREAKER
CHASSIS GROUND
CONNECTION.
GND
BASE GROUND
GND
GND
615-784
FURNACE_BLOWER
FAN6
BL
H6
H6
JF7
+
-
1
2
RED
616-140
FURNACE_ENCLOSURE_FAN_A
FAN7
BL
+24VDC
24GND
AC_LO_A
J512U
AC_HI_A
789-320
FURNACE
HOUSING
7
H6
H6
JF8
+
-
1
2
RED
616-140
FURNACE_ENCLOSURE_FAN_B
FAN8
BL
+24VDC
TEC-24PWR1
H6
TEC-24PWR2
H6
TEC-24GND1
H6
TEC-24GND2
3-G1
3-G1
3-G1
3-G1
H6
H6
JF4
+
-
1
2
RED
614-724
TOP_CABINET_FAN
FAN4
BL
GND
24GND
AC_LO_A
24GND
H6
H6
JF5
1
2
+
-
RED
614-724
BOTTOM_CABINET_FAN
FAN5
BL
J512Y
AC_HI_A
+24VDC
GND
+24VDC
AC_LO_A
24GND
24GND
J512Z
AC_HI_A
GND
J512AA
+24VDC
AC_LO_A
J512AD
AC_HI_A
GND
AC_LO_A
J512AA
1
+24VDC
24GND
24GND
H6
TEC-24PWR3
H6
TEC-24PWR4
H6
TEC-24GND3
H6
TEC-24GND4
3-G1
GND
3-G1
3-G1
J512AB
+24VDC
+24VDC
J512AG
24GND
AC_HI_B
24GND
GND
AC_LO_B
J512AE
+24VDC
+24VDC
AC_HI_B
24GND
GND
24GND
AC_LO_B
J512AM
+24VDC
AC_HI_B
+24VDC
GND
24GND
AC_LO_B
24GND
LECO
Description
Schematic
St. Joseph,
Michigan USA
CABINET
CHN628
Part Number
Date:
BASE GROUND
8
3-G1
ECLIPSE_DISTRIBUTION
GND
J512W
+24VDC
J512X
H6
J512AH
622-001-433
GND
STAMPED NEXT TO
RED
J512V
+24VDC
24GND
H1
LOAD2
H1
THIS GRAPHIC IS TO BE
H1
GND
J512AI
LOAD1
AC_HI_A
15A
J512Z
POWER ENTRY
LINE_CORD
J512AD
619-221
OVEN_HEATER_2
615-574
J512N
J512X
H5
4-C1
ECLIPSE_OVEN_CTRL
+
-
J512U
CELL_OVEN
H5
J313A
666-534X
H5
HEATER1+
J512W
J313B
J313
J313C
BL
FAN10
BL
GND
A3
FAN
619-249
RED
+
-
ACIN_HI
ACIN_LO
ECLIPSE
+
-
622-001-166
CELL_OVEN_FAN
4-C7
J313B
ECLIPSE_OVEN
RED
619-001
ANALYZER MOV
J313F
666-310X120
B11
MOV1
J512V
J512T
H6
JF6
1
J512M
+24VDC
FAN_1+
H6
J512G
+24VDC
JF3
625-099
+24VDC_IN
J512N
J313D
RJ45-DSUB
J512F
+24VDC
J512AN
ECLIPSE
A87
A88
H1
J313D
625-099
J512A
J512AJ
J512AC
V-
RJ45-DSUB
J512S
C
622-001-347
ECLIPSE
151-035
Rev
D
Type
04-09-2012_14:25
Schematic Sheet
10
2 OF 4
11
Rev G
10
Name:
J516A
ECLIPSE
ECL_PNEUMATIC_FLOW
2-B11
ECLIPSE
A4A
666-310X120
PRESSURE SENSORS
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
J516U
SENSOR
MT4
622-001-596
GND
AIN_1-
AIN_1+
+24V_OUT
BLK OUT
BRWN PS+
MT01-SPLY
H3
MT01-OUT
H3
C8
BLUE PS-
PNEUMATIC_PRESSURE
C8
J516W
1
D8
H3
+5V_ANA
3
MT01-GND
J516W
1
GND
AIN_3AIN_3+
+24V_OUT
619-043
COMBUSTION_PRESSURE
SENSOR
MT2
MTA HEADER
4
3
2
1
H3
H3
H3
H3
OUT+
622-001-606
J516X
H3
BROWN
SW14
OXYGEN_PRESSURE_SWITCH
BLUE
OUT-
H3
SW13_E
C8
+5V_ANA
AIN_4+
A4
AIN_4-
666-742X
GND
J516AA
GND
SOL13
H3
GND
H3
SOL14
GND
GND
10
10
SOL16
11
11
GND
12
12
H3
SOL17
13
13
H3
GND
14
14
SOL18
15
15
GND
16
16
17
17
GND
18
18
SOL20
19
19
GND
20
20
SOL21
21
21
GND
22
22
N/C
23
23
KEYED
24
24
GND
SOL23
GND
SOL24
GND
N/C
618-119
+
-
SV7
618-119
+
-
SV10
618-119
+
-
SV11
618-119
PV1
621-557-101
OXYGEN_LOW_FLOW VALVE
HELIUM_MICRO_CARRIER_VALVE
HELIUM_LEAK_CHECK_VALVE
J93
+
J93
10
10
11
11
HELIUM_ANALYZE_FLOW_VALVE
H7
H7
H7
H7
H7
H7
11
C4
GND
12
12
VALVE1+
13
13
VALVE1-
14
14
RED
SPLY
VALVE2+
15
15
GREEN
OUT
VALVE2-
16
16
BLACK
GND
MT01-GND
24GND
20
20
J516J
J516J
SOL1
GND
H3
H3
16
16
BALLAST_EXHAUST
H7
JF4
H7
+
-
PV4
BALLAST_INPUT
+
-
PV5
1
2
621-557-101
VALVE
BALLAST_OUTPUT
JPV6
H7
621-557-101
VALVE
+
-
PV6
621-557-101
VALVE
BALLAST_BY-PASS
SENSOR
MT1
BALLAST_PRESSURE
625-601-790
JPV7
1
2
H12
H12
C C
A A
J516L
JLH
15
PV3
621-557-101
VALVE
JHLI
JHLI
+
-
+
-
H4
H4
+
-
PV7
621-557-101
+
-
SV17
617-434
BALLAST_SAMPLE_VALVE
J20
1
2
SAMPLE_DUMP_CLOSED_SOLENOID
JSV12 B B
J516K
1
SOL2
GND
JLH
15
+
-
JPV5
H7
11
14
PISTON_HOME
JPV4
H7
SOL26
14
SWITCH
C4
MT01-OUT
H7
10
13
SW13
JPV3
H7
10
13
H7
GND
MT01-SPLY
12
616-583
JSW13
H7
C4
12
COMBUSTION_ISOLATION_VALVE
H3
OPTO_SW2
SV6
19
+
-
OXYGEN_MEDIUM_FLOW_VALVE
SOL25
19
+5V_LIM2
618-119
24GND
+24V_LIM2
SV5
H3
+
-
OXYGEN_HIGH_FLOW_VALVE
KEYED
18
H3
18
J516Z
H3
+24V
JPV1
H3
GND
OPTO_SW1
H3
H3
618-119
JSV11
H3
17
+5V_LIM1
H3
17
H3
+24V
SV4
JSV10
SW13_E
SW1
+24V_LIM1
SW13_C
H3
D4
+
-
JSV7
H3
J516Y
H3
+24V_OUT
H3
D4
JSV6
H3
J516H
SOL22
H3
SOL15
SOL19
H3
J514Y
H3
SOL12
JSV5
H3
H3
SW13_C
C8
J516X
J516AA
J516H
GND
AIN_2-
J516V
JMT2
GND
AIN_2+
J516
J516G
SOL11
Module Sheet
TOP-TopTop
JSV4
H3
H3
J516G
151035
Location:
PNEUMATIC FLOW CARD
11
SV12
619-590-509
SV19
619-590-509
SV18
619-590-509
SV14
619-590-509
SV13
619-590-509
SV16
619-590-509
SV15
619-590-509
PISTON_RETURN_VALVE
622-001-597
J516L
SOL3
GND
JSV19 B B
C C
A A
PNEUMATIC_PRESSURE_SELECT_VALVE
622-001-604
J516M
SOL4
GND
J516N
THERMAL-ELECTRIC COOLER
E
666-386X
C C
A A
J516N
1
JSV14 B B
GND
C C
A A
J516P
SOL6
GND
GND
JSV13 B B
C C
A A
J516R
JSV16 B B
A5A
C C
A A
J516R
SOL8
GND
GND
ALIQUOT_DUMP_VALVE
622-001-602
JSV15 B B
C C
A A
J516S
SOL9
SLIDE_BLOCK_OPEN_VALVE
622-001-598
THERMAL_ELECTRIC_COOLER
TEC_CARD
SLIDE_BLOCK_CLOSED_VALVE
622-001-599
J516Q
SOL7
SLIDE_BLOCK_SEAL_VALVE
622-001-603
J516Q
A5
JSV18 B B
SOL5
J516P
(FP & CN ONLY)
J516M
ALIQUOT_FILL_VALVE
622-001-601
666-310X120
J516T
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
SOL10
GND
PNEUMATIC_FLOW_CARD
J386E
J386A
2-B11
TEC-24PWR1
2-D10
TEC-24PWR2
2-D10
TEC-24GND1
2-E10
TEC-24GND2
2-E10
ECLIPSE
ECLIPSE_TEC
TEC-24PWR3
2-F10
TEC-24PWR4
2-F10
TEC-24GND3
2-F10
TEC-24GND4
2-F10
ECLIPSE
J386B
J386B
J386E
POWER_OUT1+ 1
POWER_OUT1- 2
VALVE- 3
THERMISTOR1+ 4
THERMISTOR1- 5
VALVE+ 6
POWER_OUT2- 7
POWER_OUT2+ 8
1 AUX_+24VDC
2 AUX_+24VDC
3 GND
FAN+ 1
4 GND
FAN- 2
J386C
J386
J386F
J386C
J386D
1 AUX_+24VDC
2 AUX_+24VDC
3 GND
THERMISTOR2+ 3
4 GND
THERMISTOR2- 4
SPARE1+ 1
SPARE1- 2
J386F
H11
H11
H11
H11
H11
JHP1
HP1
JHP1
JMT9
JMT9
619-225
TEC
HEAT_PUMP
MT9
619-708
H11
TEC_THERMISTOR
R
LECO
5000
JPV2
JPV2A
H15
H15
JPV2
1
2
+
-
PV2
621-557-101
VALVE
TEC_COOLER_DRAIN
H11
Description
Schematic
H11
JF2
1
2
+
-
RED
BL
FAN
619-249
FAN2
Part Number
SPARE2+ 6
Date:
Michigan USA
CABINET
CHN628
TEC_EXHAUST
SPARE2- 5
St. Joseph,
151-035
Rev
D
Type
04-09-2012_14:25
Schematic Sheet
10
3 OF 4
11
Rev G
Name:
TC CELL
HEATER CONTROL
J291G
J291G
A6
A
+5VANA
PRESSURE
GND
666-382X140
TC_CELL_CARD_V4
RED
SPLY
GREEN
OUT
BLACK
GND
A7
30psi
MT6
TC_PRESSURE
H16
TEMP
N/C
GND
VSUPPLY
GND
J634A
SOL1-
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
SOL2+
SOL2-
11
SOL3+
15
SOL3-
18
J382E
2-B11
ECLIPSE_TC
ECLIPSE
TC MEASURE+
+
+
-
SV8
1
2
TC_CELL_BLOCK
GND
TC_CELL_EXHAUST_VALVE
GND
+24V
+24V
TB1
J634
+
-
SOL4-
JHTR3&4
M-
619-945
TB3
FILAMENTS
BL
FAN9
BL
609-398
FAN
DUAL_HEATER
REFERENCE
J514C
HEATER_0_HI 1
J514E
H10
H10
JF9
+
RED
H10
H10
1 EXT_RELAY0
2 COIL_0-
3 GND
4 SOLENOID_0
2-B11
+
-
622-001-363
IR CELL
HTR8
(CN & CNS ONLY)
HTR8
622-001-363
A9A
HTR8
666-310X120
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
J284B
J241B
J241A
A21
J260B
J260
A22
666-554X
H13
H13
H13
H13
H13
H13
H13
H13
J240
J240A
A23
IR_INTERCONNECT_6.00_INCH
666-553X120
THERMOPILE_PREAMP
2 CH_GND
J514D
BALLAST_THERMISTOR
J514B
HEATER_1_LO 2
K_TC_1+ 1
3 GND
K_TC_1- 2
H14
JHT8
H14
JHTR7
H5
H5
HTR7
622-001-152
HEATER
2 COIL_1-
J514B
HEATER_1_HI 1
3 AC_LO
2
3
619-085
BALLAST_OVEN_HEATER
5000
619-301
2
3
HTR4
MT13
JHT8D
MT3
1 EXT_RELAY1
H10
1
4
619-085
BALLAST_OVEN_HEATER
IR_LINE_THERMISTOR
3
4
HTR3
625-602-480
H14
J514D
REDUCTION_TUBE
TB3A
+
-
772-735
REDUCTION_TUBE
MT5
THERMOCOUPLE
4 SOLENOID_1
H10
JHT8
JHT8C
JHT8
JHT8A
1 AC_HI
H14
J514F
10K
JHT8
HTR8
666-260X
IR_EMITTER_CTRL
JHT8B
IR_LINE_HEATER
622-001-363
JHT8A
IR_LINE_HEATER
J284A
JHT8B
IR_LINE_HEATER
622-001-363
DUAL_HTR_V7
2-E7
IR_LINE_HEATER
A7
2-E7
+
-
H16
H16
H5
TB2B
ECLIPSE
J514F
JHTR3&4
TB1B
J514A
ECLIPSE
ECL_DUAL_HTR_V7
J514C
HEATER_0_LO 2
J514E
FILAMENT
R+
TB4
TC
FAN1
JF1
+
-
SIDE_PANEL
COM
TC_CELL_BLK_HTR_CARD
RED
625-505-187
SWITCH
NC
TC_CELL_BLOCK_THERMISTOR
BLOWER
SW15
NO
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
MEASUREMENT
RTC REF+
H5
666-310X120
625-602-480
MT8
TC REF-
HEATER
MT7
10K
FILAMENT
SOL4+
TB3
619-083
TB1
J291F
1
J514
TB2
A7A
HTR6
TB2
666-721X120
HELIUM_GAS_ON_VALVE
+
-
A10
616-567-106
616-567-106
SV9
M+
TC MEASURE-
J291F
625-510-182
J634
ECLIPSE
Module Sheet
TOP-TopTop
HEATER
BALLAST_OVEN
J291C
Location:
J634A
H16
SENSE-
SOL1+
151035
DUAL_HEATER_VERSION-7
J291
666-310X120
11
666-514X170
625-601-833
J291H
J291H
SENSE+
A6A
10
(CHN ONLY)
J381E
J284E
2-B11
ECLIPSE_IR
ECLIPSE
ECLIPSE
J284C
J241B
SOL0+
SOL0-
SOL1+
SOL1-
SOL2+
SOL2-
SOL3+
SOL3-
J241A
A25
J5
J259B
J259
A26
666-554X
IR_EMITTER_CTRL
666-381X
J240
J240A
A27
666-258X
(CN & CHN ONLY)
666-240X
THERMOPILE_PREAMP
IR_CONTROL_CARD
A9
J284D
J241B
J241A
A?
J260B
J260
A?
666-554X
IR_EMITTER_CTRL
J240
J240A
A?
666-260X
666-553X
THERMOPILE_PREAMP
(S ONLY)
FURNACE CONTROL
E
A8
IR CELLS IN
628 DERIVATIVES
CHN
F
J284A
J284B
J284C
J284D
UPPER
LEFT
LOWER
LEFT
LOWER
RIGHT
UPPER
RIGHT
NOT USED
CN
IR_CELL_6"_H2O
NOT USED
NOT USED
625-348
625-348
625-509
A20
A24
IR_CELL_0.725"_CO2
NOT USED
A24
IR_CELL_0.725"_CO2
NOT USED
FP
DUAL_HEATER_VERSION-8
A8A
CHN-S
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
CN-S
NOT USED
A20
A24
A?
666-514X180
FP-S
IR_CELL_6"_H2O
NOT USED
NOT USED
IR_CELL_0.725"_CO2
IR_CELL_0.725"_CO2
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
625-348
625-348
625-345
625-345
625-345
625-509
A24
A?
IR_CELL_6"_SO2
A?
TERMINAL_BLOCK
J514
J514C
J514E
J514C
HEATER_0_HI 1
HEATER_0_LO 2
H5
3 GND
K_TC_0+ 1
4 SOLENOID_0
K_TC_0- 2
2-F7
ECLIPSE
A8
DUAL_HTR_V8
HTR6
622-001-002
AFTERBURNER
TB1A
+
-
MT10
660-010-130
COMBUSTION_FURNACE
ECLIPSE
J514F
J514F
1 AC_HI
2 CH_GND
3 AC_LO
J514B
J514B
HEATER_1_HI 1
HEATER_1_LO 2
LECO
J514A
2-F7
TB1
H5
THERMOCOUPLE
ECL_DUAL_HTR_V8
1 EXT_RELAY0
2 COIL_0-
2-A11
622-001-001
PRIMARY_FURNACE
ECLIPSE_DAUGHTER
IR_CELL_6"_SO2
IR_CELL_6"_SO2
HTR5
666-310X120
Description
Schematic
H5
H5
St. Joseph,
Michigan USA
CABINET
CHN628
J514D
1 EXT_RELAY1
2 COIL_1-
K_TC_1+ 1
3 GND
K_TC_1- 2
+
-
MT12
660-010-130
AFTERBURNER
151-035
Rev
D
THERMOCOUPLE
4 SOLENOID_1
Part Number
TB3A
Date:
Type
04-09-2012_14:25
Schematic Sheet
10
4 OF 4
11
Rev G
116
CHN628
Schematics
12
Glossary
The following section provides definitions of terms used in several

instruments. To maintain consistency, the definitions of these terms
should appear in the manuals as follows:
A
Add as Next Sample to Run: Click to enter the logged in standard
after the last sample that was analyzed.
Add to End of List: Check to enter the logged in standard in the last
row of the spreadsheet.
Afterburner Temperature: Sets the operating temperature of the
Afterburner (secondary furnace) as defined in the method. Typically
the afterburner is set at 850oC.
Aliquot Dose Reagent Tube: Purifies the gas leaving the aliquot
doser and catalyst heater by removing CO2 and moisture.
Ambient Temperature: The ambient temperature inside the
instrument as measured by a temperature transducer. This value is in
degrees centigrade.
Analysis Date: The date and time the analysis was completed.
Analysis Time: The length of the analysis in seconds.
Analyte: The specific component measured in a chemical analysis.
Autoloader: The carousel is positioned above the loading head. One
carousel can hold 29 samples and automatically drop them into the
loading head for analysis.
B
Balance Mode: If a balance is connected to the system set this
parameter to Normal. If there isnt a balance connected to the system
set this parameter to Disabled.
Baseline: Electronic line determined as the zero or reference line that
is used to differentiate the actual analyte concentration.
Index
CHN628
121
Baseline Delay Time: The amount of delay time prior to collecting

baseline data after the Analysis Stabilize Comparator is finished.
Baseline Delay Time for Nitrogen: Determines the time period to
wait before baseline data after sample gas is dumped into the
measurement system from the aliquot loop.
Baud Rate: Sets the data transmission speed in bits per second.
Selections: 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps. Default: 1200 bps
Burn Steps: Selects the number of combustion steps for analysis.
One to five steps may be added. Click Add to add steps. Click Delete to
remove steps.
C
Calibration: A comparison of a measurement standard or instrument
with another standard or instrument to report or eliminate, by
adjustment, any variation or deviation in the accuracy of the item
being compared. (Taylor, John K. "Standard Reference Materials
Handbook for SRM Users." NIST Special Publication, 260-100, 1993.)
Catalyst Heater Assembly: Removes oxygen and changes NOx to
N2 before the sample gas enters the TC cell.
Checksum: A four digit number unique to the application software
and used to verify proper installation. This number will vary between
electronic assemblies but is constant between instruments for a given
electronic assembly. This number changes with each software update.
Class: A two digit listing of all different groups of circuit boards that
are signed on to the network. Each group will have a distinct class
assigned.
Comments: A statement used to explain an operation or procedure.
Comparator Level: The minimum concentration percentage,
expressed as a percentage of peak height and offset, which will stop
analysis. Analysis will stop when the detection system output is below
a significant concentration level. The comparator level is effective only
after the minimum analysis time is met. Default: Nitrogen 100%.
Conversion Factor: The factor used to convert Percent to User
Defined. Percent multiplied by the Conversion Factor equals User
Defined. Conversion Factor is only used when Percent is selected under
Reporting Units.
122
CHN628
Index
D
Data Bits: Used to select the number of bits per byte for data that
will be transmitted. Selections: 5 to 8. Default: 7
Description: A statement used to explain or identify a sample. This is
an optional entry.
Device: A list of the various electronic assemblies in the instrument
that are connected to the network and monitored by the program.
Dosing: Injecting known volumes of gas into an instrument.
E
Endline Time: The amount of time used to collect baseline value
after the peak. Collection begins after the comparator level has been
reached. Endline Time is used in conjunction with the baseline taken
before the peak. Default: Nitrogen 2 seconds.
Equilibrate Time: The time period for gases in the ballast to mix
after it is filled.
Equilibrate Pressure Time: The time period to wait once the aliquot
loop is filled and isolated to let pressure in the aliquot loop to stabilize.
F
Fill Pressure Drop: Difference in pressure of the full ballast to a
chosen pressure for analysis.
Flux: A material that renders refractory impurities more easily fusible
and also preferentially combines with such impurities.
Furnace Filter Tube: Filters the gases leaving the furnace and
entering the thermoelectric cooler. Any particles leaving the furnace
are trapped in the filter.
Furnace Flow: The furnace gas flow rate. Selections are None, Low,
Medium, High and Maximum. Click to enter the desired flow rate.
Furnace Particle Filter: Removes dirt and particles that may not
have been trapped in the furnace filter.
Furnace Temperature: Sets the operating temperature of the
furnace (primary furnace) as defined in the method. Typically the
combustion furnace is set at 950C.
Index
CHN628
123
I
Incoming Helium Scrubber Reagent Tube: Purifies the incoming
carrier gas by removing CO2 and moisture.
Instance: A unique number assigned to an electronic assembly that
shows how many variations of each electronic assembly are present in
the instrument.
IR Baseline Time: The selected amount of time to collect baseline
data.
K
Keep Login Samples until Cancel is Pressed: Check this box to log
consecutive standards. The dialog box will reappear after OK is clicked.
L
Loading Head: During analysis, a sample is placed in the loading
head and automatically drops into the furnace for analysis.
M
Mass: The mass of the standard. Click Balance to enter a mass from
an external balance.
MAC- ID: The network ID number assigned to the electronic
assembly connected to the network. This number is assigned at power
up and can vary.
Method: The method used for analysis. Click the Down Arrow to
select from the list of methods.
Minimum Analysis Time: The minimum amount of time allotted for
analysis. This is also called integration time. During this time the cell
output is being integrated to determine the result..
Moisture Basis: No entry should be made for standard login.
124
CHN628
Index
N
NI Version: The version number of the software currently being
used. This number may vary between circuit boards, but is constant
between instruments for a given circuit board.
No Sample Drop Detection: Determines if a sample has dropped
into the furnace by comparing the nitrogen area of a blank analysis
against the nitrogen area of the current analysis multiplied by a
constant. The default constant value is 3. If the result area, multiplied
by the constant value, is less than the blank area, analysis will stop
and an error message will be logged.
Not Filled Time Out: If the ballast is not filled by the entered time
period, analysis will abort. This could be caused by a leak in the
system. This time period should be longer than the combined time of
the burn steps.
O
Operator: The name of the operator. This is an optional entry.
P
Parity: Sets the method of error checking used. Selections: Even,
Odd, or None. Default: Even
Poll Devices: Determines which electronic assemblies are signed on
to the network.
Port: Areas on the exterior of the pc tower to which peripheral
devices such as a printer or a mouse can be plugged.
Power On/Off Switch: Switches power on and off to the
determinator. The power switch is also a circuit breaker, providing
protection for the operator, determinator, and facility. The Power
On/Off Switch is located on the right side of the instrument.
Print: Click Print to receive a printout of the system configuration
settings from the system printer. These may be saved for future
reference.
Protein Factor: The value used to calculate a protein result based on
a nitrogen analysis. This is an optional entry.
Index
CHN628
125
R
Readability: The smallest increment of weight displayed. Determines
the number of digits that will display from the balance results.
Recalculated Date: The date when an analysis is recalculated. Until
an analysis is recalculated, this column will display the same data as
the Analysis Date column.
S
Sample Moisture: No entry should be made for standard login.
Sample Name: The name or type of sample. A standard should be
entered for the sample name. Click down arrow to select from the list
of standards.
Sample Size: Selects the mode of operation, macro-analysis or
microanalysis. The macro-analysis range is 50 mgs to 1.0 gram and
the microanalysis range is up to 50 mgs. Select the range that
corresponds to the expected sample analysis result.
Send Command: The command sent from the instrument that the
balance reads to send and enter the weight in the spreadsheet. Default
<ESC>P<CR><LF>
Serial Number: The hardware ID number assigned to the electronic
assembly. This number is assigned during manufacturing and is unique
to each electronic assembly. The serial number is stored on the circuit
board in a PROM.
Significant Digits: The digits required to represent the accuracy of
an approximate number beginning with the leftmost non zero digit and
ending with the rightmost non zero digit (or a zero considered to be
the exact value). For example 0.132 has three significant digits and
3.142 has four significant digits.
Standard: Determination of analyte concentration by several
laboratories utilizing more than one technique when applicable.
Standard Deviation: A measure of how precise the average is - how
well the values agree.
Stop Bits: Used to select the number of bits that are used to signal
the end of a transmitted data byte. Selections: 1 or 2. Default: 1
126
CHN628
Index
T
Tare Command: The command sent from the instrument that the
balance reads to set the weight displayed on the balance to zero.
Default: <ESC> T
TC Baseline Time: Determines the amount of time to collect baseline
data for the TC cell.
Time: The amount of time in seconds that the step will burn before
the instrument switches to the next step. Click to enter the desired
time.
U
Uncertainty: The range of values within which the true value is
estimated to be. It is the best estimate of the possible inaccuracy due
to both random and systematic error. (Taylor, John Keenan. Statistical
Techniques for Data Analysis. Lewis Publishers, Inc.: Chelsea,
Michigan. 1990)
V
Version: The number of the application firmware located on the
electronic assembly. This number can vary between electronic
assemblies but is constant between instruments for a given electronic
assembly.
Volatize: Change from solid or liquid to gas at relatively low
temperatures and pressures.
W
Weighting: Displays a factor manually entered by the user to weight
a particular calibration point. When one calibration point is assigned a
higher value than other calibration points, that point is considered
more important and is therefore favored by the calibration curve.
Index
CHN628
127
This Page Intentionally Left Blank.
128
CHN628
Index
13
Index
A
Accessory Pack ..................................................................................................130
Add Standards for Calibration ..............................................................................533
Air Filter Cleaning...............................................................................................66
Aliquot Dosing Valve Cleaning ..............................................................................67
Ambient Chart ...................................................................................................83
Ambient Monitor ................................................................................................83
Ranges .............................................................................................................86
Analysis
Abort an Analysis .....................................................................................524
Cancel Pause ...........................................................................................529
Delay ......................................................................................................527
First Time ................................................................................................55
Pause .....................................................................................................528
Multiple Samples ......................................................................................524
Standard .................................................................................................523
Auto Widths.......................................................................................................430
B
Backup (Hardware) Calibration ............................................................................88
Balance Configuration .........................................................................................433
Balance Installation ............................................................................................33
Reset ......................................................................................................34
Setup .....................................................................................................33
Test Procedure .........................................................................................34
Ballast Oven Temperature Control ........................................................................815
Ballast Tank Cleaning .........................................................................................69
Barometric Calibration ........................................................................................435
Barometric Pressure ...........................................................................................79
Blank Analysis ...................................................................................................523
Blank Analysis, Theory ........................................................................................717
Blank Calibration ................................................................................................531
Blank Login .......................................................................................................517
Burn Profile .......................................................................................................436
Index
CHN628
131
C
Calculations .......................................................................................................78
Calibration ........................................................................................................530
Calibration, Theory .............................................................................................713
Carousel
Alignment ...............................................................................................933
Cleaning .................................................................................................617
Stackable ................................................................................................37
Combustion Tube ...............................................................................................25
Packing ...................................................................................................629
Removal .................................................................................................623
Comparator Level, Theory ...................................................................................720
Component Pack ................................................................................................131
Computer Installation .........................................................................................211
Controls and Functions........................................................................................45
Correct for Atmospheric Blank .............................................................................521
Correct for Moisture ............................................................................................520
Create a Dashboard Panel ...................................................................................423
Crucible Installation ............................................................................................27
Crucible Replacement .........................................................................................632
Combustion Tube Packing ...................................................................................629
D
Data
Backup ...................................................................................................569
Fill Cells with same ...................................................................................539
Transmit Installation.................................................................................211
Define Calibration Standards ...............................................................................447
Deleting Analyzed Samples..................................................................................478
Display Configuration ..........................................................................................420
Drift Correction ..................................................................................................534
Drift Factor, Theory ............................................................................................719
132
CHN628
Index
E
Equipment Packages ...........................................................................................126
Error Messages ..................................................................................................572
Export Configuration ...........................................................................................549
Export Text Buffers ............................................................................................558
Export Text Data ................................................................................................556
F
Facility Requirements .........................................................................................132
Furnace
Diagnostics..............................................................................................813
Temperature Adjustment ..........................................................................814
Temperature Control ................................................................................814
G
Gel Capsule .......................................................................................................513
H
Hardware Calibrations .........................................................................................87
Heating Element Installation ................................................................................23
How to Perform a Leak Check ..............................................................................816
I
Illustrations List .................................................................................................17
Import Text Data ...............................................................................................559
Infrared Radiation Cell, Theory ............................................................................712
Insert a Sample .................................................................................................539
Installation ........................................................................................................23
Installing LECO Software .....................................................................................94
Interference to Other Devices ..............................................................................120
International Installation .....................................................................................25
IR Cell Removal and Service ................................................................................936
IR Detector Linearization .....................................................................................937
Index
CHN628
133
L
Language ..........................................................................................................415
Leak Check ........................................................................................................816
Flow Diagrams .........................................................................................820
Legend Symbols .......................................................................................819
Linearization ......................................................................................................937
Loading Head
Alignment and Adjustment ........................................................................926
Cleaning .................................................................................................634
Interface Block Cleaning ...........................................................................931
Interface Block Service .............................................................................931
Log Bar .............................................................................................................429
Login Periodic Maintenance ..................................................................................644
Login using Calibration Reference Material .............................................................448
M
Main Screen Overview ........................................................................................420
Maintenance Counters
Configure ................................................................................................646
Reset ......................................................................................................648
Maintenance Menu .............................................................................................413
Managing Databases ...........................................................................................459
Menu
Configuration ...........................................................................................411
Database ................................................................................................47
Diagnostics..............................................................................................413
Edit ........................................................................................................47
Maintenance ............................................................................................413
Overview.................................................................................................47
View .......................................................................................................48
Method
Clone ......................................................................................................442
Configuration ...........................................................................................436
Delete.....................................................................................................446
Edit ........................................................................................................441
Export ....................................................................................................443
Import ....................................................................................................444
Standard Additions ...................................................................................76
Micro Line Temperature Control ...........................................................................815
134
CHN628
Index
N
Network Diagnostics ...........................................................................................811
O
Operation ..........................................................................................................51
Options .............................................................................................................127
O-rings .............................................................................................................638
P
PC Tower Assembly ............................................................................................131
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................64
Poll Devices .......................................................................................................812
Power ...............................................................................................................213
Primary Dust Filters Cleaning ...............................................................................641
Printer Installation..............................................................................................36
Printing Reports .................................................................................................545
Protein Results Display .......................................................................................541
R
Reagent Tube Packing.........................................................................................29
Reagent Tube Repacking .....................................................................................639
Recalculate Results.............................................................................................540
Reduction Heater Tube Packing ............................................................................619
Reduction Tube Temperature Control ....................................................................814
Replace Drift Standard ........................................................................................537
Reset Network ...................................................................................................812
S
Sample
Analysis ..................................................................................................524
Filters .....................................................................................................452
History ....................................................................................................542
Login ......................................................................................................518
Sample Preparation ..................................................................................513
Sample Signature .....................................................................................543
Sample Template ...............................................................................................449
Delete a Sample Template.........................................................................450
Login ......................................................................................................451
Samples ............................................................................................................539
Delete.....................................................................................................540
Menu ......................................................................................................49
Set Barometric Pressure ......................................................................................87
Index
CHN628
135
Shortcuts ..........................................................................................................430
Shutdown..........................................................................................................512
Solenoids and Switches .......................................................................................831
Specifications ....................................................................................................132
Standard Calibration ...........................................................................................532
Status Bar .........................................................................................................429
System Check ....................................................................................................829
System Configuration .........................................................................................432
T
TC Cell Removal and Service ...............................................................................935
Theory of Operation............................................................................................71
Tin Foil..............................................................................................................514
Toolbar .............................................................................................................429
Transfer Export ..................................................................................................569
Transfer Import .................................................................................................571
Transmit Data ....................................................................................................560
Transmit Format Configuration.............................................................................560
Transmit Selected Samples .................................................................................568
U
Upgrade a Device ...............................................................................................812
User Defined Fields.............................................................................................456
User Permissions ................................................................................................416
V
View Calibration .................................................................................................533
View History ......................................................................................................536
View Log File .....................................................................................................645
View Signatures .................................................................................................544
W
Warranty...........................................................................................................116
136
CHN628
Index

628series CHN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

628series CHN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

628series CHN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this manual?

What is the purpose of this manual?

What chapters are included in this manual?

What chapters are included in this manual?

CHN628

Patents are Pending in U.S.A. and other countries

Figure 7-2 Pneumatic Flow Diagram .................................................75

Figure 10-26 Left Side Panel Assembly..............................................1031

Figure 10-68 Catalyst Heater Assembly .............................................1080

End users should contact their dealer/distributor or our company on

LECO-Supplied Dell Computers

Transferring Ownership of a Dell Product

An internet connection is required to complete the transfer. If an

To complete the transfer online through Dell's website, complete

For Domestic Customers:

Access Dell's website by copying and pasting or entering the

It is recommended to complete the transfer of ownership from the

Complete the transfer by completing and submitting the form

For International Customers:

Access Dell's website by copying and pasting or entering the

It is recommended to complete the transfer of ownership from the

Do not enter information into the fields. Instead, click

On the form, for original owner,

For First Original Owner, enter "LECO Corp"

For Original Owner E-mail Address, enter

For Country of Original Purchase, click the arrow and select

Complete the transfer by following the remaining instructions

Interference to Other Devices

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving

Increase the separation between the equipment and the

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different

Consult the radio or television dealer or an experienced

II. License Grant

1. transfer or allow transfer of copies of the Licensed Software to any

III. Enhancements And Support

IV. Termination Of Software License

V. Copyright And Proprietary Information

VI. Limitation Of Liability And Warranties

SOFTWARE KIT 628 SERIES

ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB

REAGENT FURNACE 100/GR

LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500GR

CASE HOLDER CD-24 BLUE/BLACK*

ASSY CHN628 230V

PACK ACCESSORY CHN628

ASSY KEY COPY PROTECTION

MONITOR COLOR 19 FLAT SCR GRY

ASSY PC TOWER 628 SERIES

CHN628CR Package consisting of: CHN628 Carbon/Hydrogen/Nitrogen

SOFTWARE KIT 628 SERIES

ANHYDRONE 10-16 MESH 1/LB

REAGENT FURNACE 100/GR

LECOSORB 20-30 MESH 500GR

CASE HOLDER CD-24 BLUE/BLACK*

ASSY CHN628 230V

PACK ACCESSORY CHN628

DISK CAL HARDWARE 628 SERIES

ASSY KEY COPY PROTECTION

SPEC SHEET AUTOLOADER RC/SC/TS